JP2021083555A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of preventing a decrease in interest in a game.SOLUTION: A game machine displays an indication of an imparted quantity regarding an imparted quantity of a game value imparted by entry of a game medium into variable winning means. Predetermined display corresponding to non-impartation of a game value as imparted quantity display is displayed at a lapse of a predetermined period when a game medium does not enter the variable winning means within a predetermined period, and specific display differing from predetermined display is displayed as an imparted quantity display at a lapse of a predetermined period when a game medium enters the variable winning means within a predetermined period. As execution timing of a deletion performance, timing immediately after starting variation, timing when starting a normal ready-to-win, and timing after development of a super-ready-to-win are provided. At the time of a fault, based on reception of a small win start designation command, specific display is erased at timing TD during a small win game state.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 10-11

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

As a gaming machine, when a gaming medium such as a gaming ball is launched into the gaming area by a launching device, the gaming medium wins a prize in a winning area such as a winning opening provided in the gaming area, and an execution condition (starting condition) is satisfied. Pachinko that enhances the interest of the game by a so-called variable display game in which a plurality of types of identification information (hereinafter referred to as display symbols) are variably displayed on a variable display device and whether or not to give a predetermined game value is determined based on the display result. There is a game machine. In such a pachinko gaming machine, when the stop symbol mode when the variable display of the display symbol in the variable display game is completely stopped becomes a specific display mode, the pachinko gaming machine becomes an advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player. In the big hit game state, the round game in which the big winning opening is open can be repeatedly executed up to a predetermined upper limit number of times.

As such a gaming machine, a gaming machine has been proposed in which the opening of the large winning opening is earlier than the timing of switching the display of the number of rounds (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2017-104625

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, although the possibility of winning a prize in the large winning opening is increased when the gaming medium is fired before the number of rounds is displayed, the number of balls to be obtained is preferably obtained. From the viewpoint of displaying the game, it is still not sufficient, and there is a risk that the player may feel uneasy and the game interest may be reduced.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a decline in the interest in gaming.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Display means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for instructing the display contents on the image display device 5) and
A variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that can change the game medium into a first state in which the game medium is easy to win and a second state in which the game medium is impossible or difficult to win.
A control means (for example, a control means capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state a plurality of times when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state. CPU103 that performs round games, etc.)
The display means
It is possible to display the grant amount display regarding the grant amount of the game value given by the game medium winning the variable winning means (for example, displaying the number of acquisitions).
When the first round game of the plurality of round games is performed, the grant amount display is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. (For example, in the first round, the number of winnings will be displayed after a predetermined period has passed after the big winning opening is opened),
When the game medium does not win the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value is not given is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, the number of acquisitions). Display "0000" as a display, etc.),
When the game medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period, the specific display is displayed without displaying the predetermined display (for example, "0015" is displayed instead of displaying "0000").
further,
Hold storage means (for example, hold information storage area for effect control) that can store information related to variable display as hold information, and
When controlled to the advantageous state, a notification effect (for example, hold continuous notification) for notifying that the hold information corresponding to the control to the advantageous state is stored in the hold storage means can be executed. The effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of step 010AKS004 and step 010AKS007) and
By executing the notification effect, the specific display means capable of displaying the specific display (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 010AKS007) and
An erasing effect executing means (for example, step 010AKS024) capable of executing a specific display erasing effect (for example, erasing effect) for erasing the specific display at a predetermined timing (for example, timing TA, TB, or TC) of the variable display corresponding to the specific display. The effect control CPU 120) that executes the process of step 010AKS025 is provided.
If the specific display is not erased at the predetermined timing due to a predetermined event (for example, an error in the omission of the fluctuation pattern command or the deletion effect setting process) while the specific display is displayed, the specific display is not deleted at the predetermined timing. It is possible to execute a special control for erasing the specific display at a later specific timing (for example, timing TD) (for example, the process of step 010AKS045 can be executed).
It is characterized by that.

According to such a configuration, since the special display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a deterioration of the game interest without giving anxiety to the player. Further, according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being distrusted by the continuous display of the specific display, and it is possible to preferably execute the notification effect.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions according to the following means 2 to 6. Corresponding to the fact that the hold continuous notification effect is executed until the next big hit in the game machine that conventionally executes the hold continuous notification effect as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-99309. When displaying the specific display, if the specific display is not normally erased due to a defect or the like, there is a risk that the player may feel distrust. It was made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and it is necessary to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably performing the production.
(2) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 010AK).
Hold storage means (for example, hold information storage area for effect control) that can store information related to variable display as hold information, and
When controlled to the advantageous state, a notification effect (for example, hold continuous notification) for notifying that the hold information corresponding to the control to the advantageous state is stored in the hold storage means can be executed. The effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of step 010AKS004 and step 010AKS007) and
By executing the notification effect, the specific display means capable of displaying the specific display (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 010AKS007) and
An erasing effect executing means (for example, step 010AKS024) capable of executing a specific display erasing effect (for example, erasing effect) for erasing the specific display at a predetermined timing (for example, timing TA, TB, or TC) of the variable display corresponding to the specific display. The effect control CPU 120) that executes the process of step 010AKS025 is provided.
If the specific display is not erased at the predetermined timing due to a predetermined event (for example, an error in the omission of the fluctuation pattern command or the deletion effect setting process) while the specific display is displayed, the specific display is not deleted at the predetermined timing. It is also possible to execute a special control for erasing the specific display at a later specific timing (for example, timing TD) (for example, the process of step 010AKS045 can be executed).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being distrusted by the continuous display of the specific display, and it is possible to preferably execute the notification effect.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (2) above,
A game control means for controlling the progress of the game (for example, a main board 11, a game control microcomputer 100, a CPU 103), and
The effect control means (for example, the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120) that controls the effect based on the information from the game control means is provided.
When the specific display is not erased at the predetermined timing because the effect control means cannot normally receive information (for example, a variation pattern designation command) from the game control means at the start of variable display, the game control means. The special control may be executed based on the information received from the means at the start of the advantageous state (for example, a hit start designation command).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being distrusted by the continuous display of the specific display, and it is possible to preferably execute the notification effect.

(4) In the gaming machine of (3) above
The display priority of the effect at the start of the advantageous state, which is executed based on the information received at the start of the advantageous state, is set higher than that of the specific display.
During the effect period at the start of the advantageous state, the specific display may be erased (for example, FIGS. 14-9 (H) to (J)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being distrusted by the continuous display of the specific display, and it is possible to preferably execute the notification effect.

(5) In any of the gaming machines (2) to (4) above,
There are multiple predetermined timings,
The specific timing may be a timing after the last timing among the plurality of predetermined timings (for example, FIG. 14-4).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the specific display from being erased in a situation where the execution timing of the specific display erase effect still remains, which gives the player a sense of discomfort.

(6) In any of the gaming machines (2) to (5) above,
The specific display means can display the specific display by any one of a plurality of types of display modes including at least the first mode and the second mode which is more advantageous to the player than the first mode. ,
When the specific display is displayed in the second aspect and the specific display is not erased at the predetermined timing due to the occurrence of a predetermined event, the display mode of the specific display is displayed at the specific timing in the first aspect. It may be possible to execute the control for changing from the aspect to the second aspect (for example, FIG. 14-11).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being distrusted by the continuous display of the specific display of the second aspect, and it is possible to preferably execute the notification effect.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a figure which shows the lighting example of a game effect lamp. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big hit opening preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing during jackpot opening. It is a flowchart which shows an example of various display processing. It is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the big winning opening, the timing of various displays, and the like. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in an image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in an image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in an image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in an image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in an image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in an image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in an image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in an image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows an example of the state which a game ball is sandwiched by a special variable winning ball device. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in an image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the big winning opening, the timing of various displays, and the like. It is a flowchart which shows an example of various display processing. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in an image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in an image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature part 152F. It is a figure which shows the hit type table. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows the hit determination table and the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows the start port switch passing process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit opening preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during small hit opening. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit end processing. It is a display screen figure which shows the production example of the notification effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notification effect execution presence / absence determination table, the notification effect content determination table, the V mode determination table, the hit time suggestion effect execution decision table, and the hit time suggestion effect execution decision table. It is a flowchart which shows the notification effect processing. It is a flowchart which shows the hold continuous notification setting processing of the feature part 003AK. It is a figure which shows an example of the hold information storage area for effect control of a feature part 003AK. It is a figure which shows the decision ratio in the hold continuous notification processing of a feature part 003AK. It is a timing chart which shows the execution timing of the erasing effect of the feature part 003AK. It is a timing chart which shows the execution timing of the change effect of the feature part 003AK. It is a flowchart which shows the change effect setting process of the feature part 003AK. It is a flowchart which shows the erasing effect processing of a feature part 003AK. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the feature part 003AK. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the feature part 003AK. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the feature part 003AK. It is a flowchart which shows the change effect setting process of the modification of the feature part 003AK. It is a flowchart which shows the hold continuous notification setting processing of the feature part 010AK. It is a figure which shows an example of the hold information storage area for effect control of a feature part 010AK. It is a figure which shows the decision ratio in the hold continuous notification setting processing of a feature part 010AK. It is a timing chart which shows the execution timing of the erasing effect of the feature part 010AK. It is a flowchart which shows the erasing effect setting process of the feature part 010AK. It is a flowchart which shows the erasing effect processing of the feature part 010AK. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd erasing effect setting process of the feature part 010AK. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the feature part 010AK. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the feature part 010AK. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the feature part 010AK. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the feature part 010AK.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special figure game and the second special figure game, decorative symbols (such as symbols indicating numbers) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbols are displayed. Is variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. The total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the first special figure game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

A predetermined ball receiving member always keeps a constant open state at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three places on the lower left of the game area and one place on the upper side of the variable winning ball device 6B). A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Below the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the game area. As shown in the figure, the frame lamp 9b includes a lower left lamp 9bL1 in a lower left portion, an upper left lamp 9bL2 in an upper left portion, a lower right lamp 9bR1 in a lower right portion, and an upper right lamp 9bR2 in an upper right portion. Further, an attacker lamp 9c is provided in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2. Further, speaker lamps 9eL and 9eR are provided in the speakers 8L and 8R portions corresponding to the speakers 8L and 8R, respectively. A display device lower lamp 9f is provided at a position below the image display device 5 on the game board 2, and the display device lower lamp 9f includes a left side display device lower lamp 9fL and a right side display device lower lamp 9fR as shown in the figure. There is. Further, 9 g of lamps in the vicinity of the general winning opening are provided in the vicinity of the general winning opening 10 provided at three locations on the lower left side of the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (upper position of the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. When the movable body lamp 9d, the above-mentioned main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, speaker lamp 9eL, 9eR, display device lower lamp 9f, and general winning opening vicinity lamp 9g are collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9. There is. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, the speaker lamps 9eL and 9eR, the display device lower lamp 9f, and the general winning opening vicinity lamp 9g are configured to include LEDs.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, the gaming balls paid out as prize balls and the gaming balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, stick controller 31A and push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. On the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as a jackpot winning probability and a ball output rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 such as a predetermined position of the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured by using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is visually recognized with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base. The ream ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning a prize to the big prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The role ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed. The display monitor 29 may be capable of displaying a setting value or the like to be changed or confirmed when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long square frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 500A covers the right side portion of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back surface side. The security cover 500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 500Aa and a long piece 500Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player on the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a common symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (although the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined mode. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29.5 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). It will continue until one of the earlier timings. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player. In the big hit game state, a so-called right-handed hit that launches the game ball into the game area on the right side may be performed so that the game ball is won in the big prize opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and maximum opening period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc.) are prepared, and the big hit type is set according to these. Has been done. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls are obtained, or a jackpot type in which almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in the time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in the probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in the normal state. The high-accuracy state and low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there may be no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9 It may be turned on or off, the operation of the movable body 32, or an effect using an arbitrary effect device including a part or all of them.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability change symbol becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," "is a predetermined small hit combination as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative symbol may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a pre-reading advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Furthermore, the power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are configured so that not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which a conductor pattern is formed and electric components can be mounted, but also electric components are mounted on the electronic circuit boards to realize specific electrical functions. It is a concept including the electronic circuit mounting board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, electric power from an AC power source such as AC100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as a main board 11 and an effect control board 12 by a power supply board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifying circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage to a specific direct current voltage (for example, direct current 12V, direct current 5V, etc.), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if a part or all of the RAM 102 is stopped from supplying power to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The reset signal, power cutoff signal, and clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for putting a control circuit such as a game control microcomputer 100 into an operation stop state, and can be output by using any of a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, and a system reset IC. All you need is. The power cutoff signal turns off when the predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period during which the predetermined power supply voltage falls below the predetermined value continues for the power interruption reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door opening sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, thereby causing the image display device 5 to display the effect image. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output sound) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, for example, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in the ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. When such a clear signal in the ON state is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. The backup data may be stored in RAM 102, which is a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, and the like may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery conditions can be satisfied.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the recovery process (step S4) is executed, and then the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. By the recovery process in step S4, the work area is set based on the stored contents of the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped. For example, when the special symbol is changing, the state before the stop is special. It suffices if the fluctuation of the symbol can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the initialization process (step S6) is executed, and then the setting change process (step S7) is executed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and the initial value is set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including the fact that the clear signal is in the off state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the off state, the fact that the clear signal is in the off state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is set, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is terminated, the setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in the gaming stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. When the game is stopped, the launch of the game ball by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle, the detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled so that the lost symbol or the like is stopped and displayed, or the display corresponding to the game stopped state different from the lost symbol is displayed. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed to the setting change state, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed. After that, based on the fact that the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a staff member of the amusement park or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is stored. Turns off. When the setting change state is terminated, the setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in the game stop state as in the case of the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, the control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, if the clear switch is on, the step is performed together with the initialization process in step S6. The setting change process of S7 is executed and the setting change state can be controlled. If the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation state can be controlled. If the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off when the power supply is started, the initialization process of step S6 is executed if the clear switch is on. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and interrupts are permitted (step S10). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 5 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning (information indicating the number of times of winning, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of probability change state, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure hit". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of hold memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold memories, the read-ahead judgment, etc. is set on the effect control board 12. Be told. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be memorized, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is set using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are set to change the special symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "miss", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions for the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the upper limit execution number is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 has a configuration in which the winning probability of a big hit and the payout rate change according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the jackpot winning probability and the ball output rate are changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. For example, the set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning a big hit, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the probability of winning a big hit. In this example, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. .. If the jackpot winning probability changes according to the set value, the ball output rate may also change according to the set value. While the jackpot winning probability is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state may change according to the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured so that any one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player can be set. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12.

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table. FIG. 7A shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. 7B shows the second special figure of the variable special figure. A configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used in the case of the figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 is assigned to the special figure display result which is the variable display result of the special symbol according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

In the display result judgment table, when the game state is in the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values than in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state) are displayed as a special figure of "big hit". Assigned to the result. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a high-probability state such as a probabilistic state in which the probabilistic change control is performed, there is a probability that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is determined to be controlled to the jackpot game state as compared with the low-probability state such as the normal state or the time-saving state. It gets higher.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, it is determined that the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. A value has been assigned. In the display result determination table for the second special figure, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit game state as a "small hit" is the probability of being determined to be controlled to the small hit game state regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that they have the same value as the judgment table. It should be noted that the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit" may be different according to the set value. Regardless of the variable special figure, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit gaming state as "small hit" may be the same probability.

In the display result judgment table for the first special figure and the display result judgment table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is irrespective of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and while only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set, the set value 2 to the set value 6 In this case, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result judgment table for the first special figure and the display result judgment table for the second special figure, when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judgment. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "big hit", so that only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set, while the set value 2 to the set value In the case of 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit judgment values is small for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is the set value as in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Regardless of, it is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit judgment values is small for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is the set value as in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Regardless of, it is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

The set value that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be. The playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is 65%. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through the switch, the game property (so-called V) in which the ratio of the game ball passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the fluctuation special figure. Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which a ball is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and the small hit are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small while the probability is high (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the playability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as the effect switch (to execute the predetermined effect each time the game ball passes through the predetermined area. When the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (for controlling the game state to the probability change state or the jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. Since the execution rate of normal reach or super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value may be suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach or super reach. Alternatively, the execution ratios of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value. In addition, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 8 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 9, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when receiving an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to "" and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as a game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other may have a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature 042AK)
Next, the gaming machine in the feature unit 042AK of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-1 to 10-21. The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 042AK of the present embodiment starts displaying the number of balls acquired after a predetermined period in which the attacker is in the open state in the first round game, and the attacker wins a prize within the predetermined period. If not, a predetermined display indicating that the number of balls won has not increased is displayed, and if the attacker wins a prize within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed. Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 042AK having such features will be described. The same parts as those described in the above basic explanation will be omitted.

FIG. 10-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, which includes a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b (lower left lamp 9bL1, upper left lamp 9bL2, lower right lamp 9bR1, upper right lamp 9bR2), attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d. , Speaker lamps 9eL, 9eR, display device lower lamp 9f (left side display device lower lamp 9fL, right side display device lower lamp 9fR), general winning opening vicinity lamp 9g, and other game effect lamps 9 are all turned on. It is a figure. In the feature portion 042AK of the present embodiment, which will be described in detail later, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b (lower left lamp 9bL1, upper left lamp 9bL2, lower right lamp 9bR1, upper right lamp 9bR2), attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d , Speaker lamps 9eL, 9eR, display device lower lamp 9f (left side display device lower lamp 9fL, right side display device lower lamp 9fR), game effect lamp 9 such as general winning opening vicinity lamp 9g, lights in sequence from lower left to lower right. It is possible to suggest to the player that he should hit right.

FIG. 10-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 10-2, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is on (step 042AKS001). At this time, if the jackpot flag is on (step 042AKS001; Yes), the effect waiting time at the start of the jackpot is set (step 042AKS002). For example, in the process of step 042AKS002, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the effect waiting time at the start of the big hit may be set in the game control process timer provided in the RAM 102.

Following the process of step 042AKS002, a setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is made (step 042AKS003). For example, in the process of step 042AKS003, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the hit start designation command table prepared in advance for transmitting the hit start designation command is the buffer area designated by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. It should be stored in. After that, the jackpot flag is cleared to turn it off (step 042AKS004). In addition, a setting for ending the probability change state and the time saving state is made (step 042AKS005). For example, in step 042AKS005, a process of clearing the probability change flag and the time saving flag to turn off the state, a process of clearing the special figure fluctuation counter for counting the number of executions of the special figure game in the probability change state and the time saving state, and the like are performed. It should be executed. Then, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "4", which is a value corresponding to the pre-processing for opening the large winning opening (step 042AKS006), the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

If the big hit flag is off in step 042AKS001 (step 042AKS001; No), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is on (step 042AKS007). At this time, if the small hit flag is on (step 042AKS007; No), the effect waiting time at the start of the small hit is set (step 042AKS008). For example, in the process of step 042AKS008, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the effect waiting time at the start of the small hit may be set in the game control process timer.

Following the process of step 042AKS008, the setting for transmitting the hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is made in the same manner as the process of step 042AKS003 (step 042AKS009). After that, the small hit flag is cleared to turn it off (step 042AKS010). Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8", which is a value corresponding to the small hit opening preprocessing (step 042AKS011).

If the small hit flag is off in step 042AKS007 (step 042AKS007; No), the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 042AKS012). .. After executing any of the processes of step 042AKS011 and step 042AKS012, it is determined whether or not to end the probability change state or the time saving state (step 042AKS013). For example, in the process of step 042AKS003, the value of the special figure fluctuation count counter (special figure fluctuation count value) is updated by, for example, 1 subtraction or 1 addition, and the updated special figure fluctuation count value is predetermined. It is determined whether or not it matches the special game state end determination value. At this time, if it matches the special game state end determination value, the probability change state or the time reduction state may be ended and the normal state may be controlled by clearing the probability change flag or the time reduction flag to turn it off. On the other hand, if it does not match the special game state end determination value, the state of the probability change flag and the time saving flag may be maintained, and the process of step 042AKS013 may be completed. After executing the end determination of the probability change state or the time saving state, the special symbol stop process ends. It should be noted that the end determination based on the special figure fluctuation count value may be performed only when the time is shortened, and the probability variation state may be continued until the next variable display result becomes a "big hit". .. Alternatively, for example, the probability change state is terminated by extracting numerical data indicating a random value for determining the probability change state end from a random counter provided in the RAM 102 and referring to the probability change state end determination table previously stored in the ROM 101 or the like. It may be decided whether or not to do so.

FIG. 10-3 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S114 of FIG. 6 as the big hit opening pre-process. In the jackpot opening preprocessing shown in FIG. 10-3, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot start flag is on (step 042AKS021). Here, the jackpot start flag is set to the on state in the special symbol stop process of step S113 shown in FIG. 6 in response to the jackpot flag being on. If the jackpot start flag is on in step 042AKS021 (step 042AKS021; Yes), it is determined whether or not the jackpot start effect is waiting (step 042AKS022). As an example, in the special symbol stop process in step S113 shown in FIG. 3, when the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the effect waiting time at the start of the jackpot is set. Set in the game control process timer. In this case, in the process of step S312, it is determined that the jackpot start effect is waiting in response to the fact that the game control process timer value does not match the predetermined waiting time elapsed determination value (for example, "0"). , Corresponding to the match, it may be determined that the production is not waiting at the start of the big hit.

If the jackpot start effect is waiting in step 042AKS022, step 042AKS022; Yes), for example, after updating by subtracting 1 from the game control process timer value (step 042AKS023), the jackpot opening pre-processing ends. On the other hand, if the jackpot start production is not waiting in step 042AKS022 (step 042AKS022; No), the jackpot start flag is cleared (step 042AKS024), and the jackpot opening count counter is cleared. (Step 042AKS025), the jackpot type buffer value stored in the RAM 102 is read out (step 042AKS026), and the release control pattern corresponding to the jackpot type buffer value is set. In the feature unit 042AK of the present embodiment, a common opening control pattern is set regardless of the jackpot type. For example, when there is a jackpot type of "probability", a jackpot of "probability change" or "non-probability change" It may be set to an open control pattern different from the type. Further, even if the jackpot type is "probability variation" or "non-probability variation", different opening control patterns are set depending on the jackpot type, for example, the jackpot type of "probability variation 1" and "probability variation 2" are set to different opening control patterns. It may be set in a pattern.

After executing the process of step 042AKS026, it is determined whether or not the player is waiting for opening the large winning opening in the next round (waiting for the next opening) (step 042AKS027). As an example, in the process of step 042AKS027, it is determined whether or not the game control process timer value matches the next release wait end determination value, and if it does not match, it is determined that the next release wait is in progress, but if they match. If so, it may be determined that the next release is not waiting. If the next opening standby is in step 042AKS027 (step 042AKS027; Yes), the process proceeds to step 042AKS023 to update the game control process timer value. The game control process timer value updated in step 042AKS023 is the time set as the waiting time at the start of the jackpot in step 042AKS002 shown in FIG. 10-2, or the post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 of FIG. This is the time set as the interval time between each round.

If it is determined in step 042AKS027 that the next opening is not waiting (step 042AKS027; No), the large winning opening is opened according to the set opening control pattern and the count value in the large winning opening opening counter. (Step 042AKS028). As an example, in the process of step 042AKS028, a large prize formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is formed by setting a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the large prize opening opening time in the game control process timer. The large prize opening time, which is the upper limit of the time for opening the mouth, is set. Further, for example, the solenoid drive signal for the predetermined large winning opening door is started to be output via the predetermined solenoid circuit, so that the large winning opening door solenoid for opening the large winning opening is turned on. The state is set.

At this time, for example, when the count value in the large winning opening opening counter is any of "1" to "15", the timer initial value corresponding to 29.5 seconds as the large winning opening opening time is the game control process timer. Is set to.

Then, the CPU 103 makes a setting for transmitting the designated command during the opening of the large winning opening to the effect control board 12 (step 042AKS029). After executing the process of step 042AKS029, the value of the special figure process flag is updated by adding 1 to the count value of the number of times the large winning opening is opened (step 042AKS030), and the value of the special figure process flag is a value corresponding to the process during the opening of the big hit. After updating to "5" (step 042AKS031), the pre-processing for opening the large winning opening is completed.

FIG. 10-4 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S115 of FIG. 6 as the process during the opening of the jackpot. In the big hit opening process shown in FIG. 10-4, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the game ball has won the big winning opening by, for example, determining whether or not the count switch 23 has been turned on. (Step 042AKS041). If there is no winning of the game ball in the large winning opening in step 042AKS041 (step 042AKS041; No), the process proceeds to step 042AKS044.

On the other hand, if there is a winning of the game ball to the big winning opening in step 042AKS041 (step 042AKS041; Yes), the CPU 103 updates by adding 1 to the winning number count value, and the game ball is the big winning opening. A setting is made to transmit a prize designation command indicating that a prize has been won from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step 042AKS042). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the updated winning number count value is a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step 042AKS043). If the winning number count value is not a predetermined number (step 042AKS043; No), after the game control process timer value is subtracted by 1 and updated (step 042AKS044), for example, the game control process timer value corresponds to 29.5 seconds. It is determined whether or not 29.5 seconds have elapsed since the large winning opening was opened, depending on whether or not the timer value is matched (step 042AKS045). At this time, if 29.5 seconds have not elapsed (step 042AKS045; No), the process of opening the large winning opening is terminated as it is.

When it is determined in step 042AKS043 that the updated winning number count value is a predetermined number (step 042AKS043; Yes), or 29.5 seconds have passed since the large winning opening was opened in step 042AKS045. When it is determined (step 042AKS043; Yes), for example, the output of the solenoid drive signal to the predetermined solenoid for the winning opening door is stopped via the predetermined solenoid circuit to close the winning opening. The solenoid for the large winning door is set to be turned off (step 042AKS046), and the winning number count value is cleared (step 042AKS047).

After executing the process of step 042AKS047, the setting for transmitting the designated command after opening the large winning opening is made to the effect control board 12 (step 042AKS048), and the value of the special figure process flag is set after opening the large winning opening. After updating to "6", which is a value corresponding to the processing (step 042AKS049), the processing during the jackpot opening is terminated.

In this way, the special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 10-2, the jackpot opening pre-processing shown in FIG. 10-3, the jackpot opening processing shown in FIG. 10-4, etc. (including the jackpot opening post-processing and the jackpot end processing). Is executed to set transmission of various effect control commands such as a winning start designation command, a large winning opening open designation command, a winning designation command, and a large winning opening post-opening designation command. Then, the command control process of step S27 of FIG. 5 is executed, and the effect control command set to be transmitted is transmitted to the control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12, so that the effect control board 12 side , The timing of each timing such as the start of the big hit, the opening and closing of the big winning opening (start of the round) and the closing (the end of the round), the winning of the big winning opening and the end of the big hit, etc. is grasped.

FIG. 10-5 is a flowchart showing an example of processing performed in the jackpot middle effect processing of step S176 of FIG. 9 as various display processing. In the various display processes shown in FIG. 10-5, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a hit end designation command has been received (step 042AKS051). When it is determined in the big hit opening post-processing of step S116 of FIG. 6 that the number of executions of the round that opens the big winning opening has reached the set upper limit execution number, the hit end designation command is executed on the main board. It is a command transmitted from the side of 11, and is a command for ending the effect during the big hit and executing the ending effect.

When it is determined that the hit end designation command has not been received (step 042AKS051; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the nR (the nR predetermined period has elapsed). Determine (step 042AKS052). Note that n is a variable indicating the number of rounds, and the initial value is set to "1", which is sequentially added by 1 in the process of step 042AKS066 described later, and cleared to "1" in step 042AKS066. The predetermined period is 0.6 seconds, which is set as a timer value at the start of the round game, and when the timer value becomes "0", it may be determined that the predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the nR round. More specifically, from the side of the main board 11 in response to the fact that the big prize opening is completely open (it is detected that the big winning door has moved to the position where it is completely open). The designated command during the opening of the large winning opening is transmitted, and the timer value for a predetermined period may be counted from the timing when the command is received.

In addition, in the feature unit 042AK of the present embodiment, as will be described later, after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the round game of the first round, the number of acquired balls is displayed and the number of rounds is indicated. The display is done. On the side of the production control board 12, the number of acquisitions is obtained each time a winning designation command indicating that the game ball has won a prize is received in the big winning opening during the period from the big hit to the end (the period from the fanfare to the ending). Is continuously added by 15. When the effect control board 12 receives the prize designation command, it is necessary to first analyze the command, add the number of acquisitions, and display the added number of acquisitions. It takes a predetermined period to display. Therefore, if the predetermined period is too short, the series of processes will not be in time for the winning from the start of the round game of the first round until the predetermined period elapses, and "0000" will be displayed as the number of acquisitions. , The process of displaying "0015" may not catch up even though the prize is won (it becomes "0015" after "0000" is displayed, which gives the player a sense of discomfort). Therefore, in the feature unit 042AK of the present embodiment, when a predetermined period of 0.6 seconds is provided and the game ball existing at the upper part of the large winning opening at the opening timing wins a prize from the opening until the number of rounds is displayed. In addition, a period in which "0015" is directly displayed without displaying "0000" as the number of acquisitions is secured. On the other hand, in the feature unit 042AK of the present embodiment, the predetermined period is set to 0.6 seconds, which is the same as the firing interval when continuously firing, and the period from firing to winning the grand prize opening is set. Even if it is taken into consideration, the time interval required for the continuously fired game balls to win a prize in the large winning opening is the firing interval. Therefore, the number of winnings in the large winning opening is one from the opening of the large winning opening to the display of the number of winnings. Therefore, by increasing the number of winnings in the state before the number of acquisitions and the number of rounds are displayed, it is possible to prevent the number of acquisitions from being displayed at the timing when the number of rounds is displayed and giving the player a sense of discomfort. can do. Although the predetermined period in the feature unit 042AK of the present embodiment is 0.6 seconds, which is the same as the firing interval, the predetermined period is not limited to 0.6 seconds and may be changed as appropriate.

When it is determined that the predetermined period has not elapsed since the start of the nR (step 042AKS052; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not n = 1, that is, whether or not it is the first round. Determine (step 042AKS053). n is a variable indicating the number of rounds, which is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. As described above, the initial value is set to "1", and 1 is sequentially added in the process of step 042AKS066, and "1" is added in step 042AKS068. Cleared to. In the process of step 042AKS053, it is determined whether or not n = 1 by confirming the value of n.

When it is determined that n = 1 (step 042AKS053; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs a right-handed effect suggesting that the player should hit right, and suggests that the player is in a big hit game state. The operation of the fanfare effect is controlled (step 042AKS054). On the other hand, when it is determined that n ≠ 1 (step 042AKS053; No), the effect control CPU 120 displays the number of rounds corresponding to the n-1R, displays the number of acquisitions, and displays the number of acquisitions, and the n-1R. The operation control of the effect during the big hit is performed (step 042AKS055). In the process of step 042AKS055, for example, when n = 2, the round display indicating that it is the first round and the number of acquisitions are displayed, and the operation control of the big hit middle effect corresponding to the first round is performed. In the process of step 042AKS055, as a jackpot effect, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9 is made to emit light in a pattern corresponding to the jackpot effect, and predetermined music and sound are emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. It suffices if the production of outputting is performed. The light emission pattern of the game effect lamp 9 during the jackpot production may be set in advance.

After executing the process of step 042AKS054 or step 042AKS055, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the winning designation command has been received, that is, whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the large winning opening (step 042AKS056). In the process of step 042AKS056, the winning is determined from the start of the nR to the predetermined period. When the winning designation command has not been received (step 042AKS056; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends various display processes as it is.

When the winning designation command is received, that is, when the winning opening is won by the predetermined period from the start of the nR (step 042AKS056; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 counts the number of winning balls. Is added by "15" (step 042AKS057). The count value of the number of acquired balls is stored in advance in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 with an initial value of "0", and "15" is added by the process of step 042AKS057 or the process of step 042AKS063 described later. The number of balls won is continuously counted during the so-called consecutive villa, and is cleared to "0" at the timing when the time saving control ends without the variable display result becoming a "big hit", that is, at the end timing of the consecutive villa. .. After executing the process of step 042AKS057, the effect control CPU 120 causes the attacker lamp 9c to emit light and outputs a winning sound corresponding to the winning (step 042AKS058). The light emission of the attacker lamp 9c in the process of step 042AKS058 (the same applies to step 042AKS064) is, for example, more than the number of light emission per unit time of the game effect lamps 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c that emits light during the big hit production (winning prize). It emits light in an aspect of notifying that it has been done. Therefore, it becomes easy to visually recognize that the game ball has won the big prize opening, and the game interest can be improved. As for the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c, the number of times of light emission per unit time may be larger at the time of winning and at the time of producing during the big hit. When a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening, the attacker lamp 9c is made to emit light regardless of whether or not the winning is within a predetermined period, and a winning sound is output. Therefore, it becomes easy to recognize that the game ball has won the big prize opening, and the game interest can be improved.

After executing the process of step 042AKS058, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not n = 1, that is, whether or not it is the first round (1st R), as in step 042AKS053 (step 042AKS059). ). If n = 1, that is, if it is the first round (step 042AKS059; Yes), the various display processes are terminated as they are. On the other hand, if n ≠ 1, that is, if it is not the first round (step 042AKS059; No), the count value of the number of acquired balls added in step 042AKS057 is displayed (the number of acquired balls is displayed), and the number of acquired balls is displayed. After the update display (step 042AKS060), various display processes are terminated. In addition, in the feature unit 042AK of the present embodiment, when the acquired number update display is performed in the process of step 042AKS060, the count value of the acquired number of balls added in step 042AKS057 is not displayed as it is, but is shown in FIG. 10-. As shown in 12 (a-23), the count-up display (notification display indicating that the number of acquisitions is increasing) is performed, and then the number of acquisitions is displayed. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the number of balls to be acquired increases, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

When it is determined in step 042AKS052 of FIG. 10-5 that a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the nR (step 042AKS052; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 displays the number of rounds corresponding to the nR and the number of acquisitions. And, at the same time, the operation control of the effect during the big hit of the nR is performed (step 042AKS061). When n = 1, that is, in the case of the first round, the number of rounds and the number of acquisitions are displayed for the first time in step 042AKS061. In this case, if there is a prize before the elapse of the predetermined period, the number of acquisitions is updated and displayed in the step 042AKS061. Specifically, if a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening before the lapse of a predetermined period, the number of acquisitions is added by "15" in step 042AKS057. Therefore, in step 042AKS061, FIG. 10-11 (a-20). ) Is displayed to count up (notification display that the number of acquisitions is increasing), and then as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-21), the number of acquisitions has not increased in this big hit. The number of acquisitions (display of "0015") is displayed (display of "0015") different from the predetermined display indicating (in the case of a consecutive villa, the display of the number of acquisitions at the time of the previous big hit plus "15" is counted. You can do it after the upload). On the other hand, if the game ball has not won the big prize opening before the lapse of the predetermined period, the number of winnings remains "0" and the number of winnings has not increased in this big hit. Therefore, FIG. 10-11 (a) As shown in -22), as a predetermined display, the number of acquisitions is displayed (display of "0000") indicating that the number of acquisitions has not increased (if it is in a consecutive villa, the number of acquisitions at the time of the previous big hit remains the same You can display it). In addition to "0000" as the display of the number of acquisitions (predetermined display) indicating that the number of acquisitions has not increased, a display other than a number such as "---" or "not increased" is performed. You may do so. Further, in step 042AKS061, as a jackpot effect, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9 is made to emit light in a pattern corresponding to the jackpot effect, and predetermined music and sound are emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. It suffices if the production of outputting is performed. The light emission pattern of the game effect lamp 9 during the jackpot production may be set in advance. In this way, during the predetermined period after the large winning opening is opened, that is, in the situation where the number of winnings is not displayed, only the attacker lamp 9c lights up when the game ball wins the large winning opening. However, in a situation where the number of acquisitions after the lapse of the predetermined period is displayed, the effect lamps 9 provided on the frame 3 for the double-game machine and the effect lamps 9 provided on the game board 2 are alternately alternated. Is turned on, and more effect lamps 9 are emitted than during a predetermined period. Therefore, since the specific display is performed when the prize is won within the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving anxiety to the player, and after the number of acquisitions after the predetermined period is displayed. The production can be lively and the game entertainment can be improved. Further, since the effect lamp 9 is emitted at the same timing as the execution timing of the big hit middle effect, the effect can be excited at once at the timing when the big hit medium effect is executed, and the game entertainment can be improved.

After executing the process of step 042AKS061, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the winning designation command has been received, that is, whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the large winning opening (step 042AKS062). When the winning designation command is received, that is, when there is a winning in the big winning opening (step 042AKS062; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 adds "15" to the count value of the number of acquired balls (step 042AKS063). The attacker playing card 9c is made to emit light, the winning sound corresponding to the winning is output, the count-up is displayed (notification display that the number of acquisitions is increasing), and then the number of acquisitions is displayed. The number of acquisitions is updated. (Step 042AKS064).

After executing the process of step 042AKS064, or when the winning designation command is not received in step 042AKS062 (step 042AKS062; No), has the effect control CPU 120 started the next round of the nR, the n + 1R? It is determined whether or not (step 042AKS065). In step 042AKS065, for example, it may be determined whether or not a designated command during opening of the large winning opening indicating the start of the n + 1R is received from the side of the main board 11. If the n + 1R has not started, that is, if the designated command during opening of the large winning opening has not been received and the nR remains (step 042AKS065; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends various display processes as it is. .. On the other hand, when the n + 1R starts, that is, when a designated command indicating the start of the n + 1R is received (step 042AKS065; Yes), after adding n by "1" (step 042AKS066), various display processes. To finish. For example, when n = 1, that is, in the first round, n = 2 in step 042AKS066. Although n = 2 and the second round, until the predetermined period elapses, it is determined as No in steps 042AKS052 and 053, and in step 042AKS055, it corresponds to the first round which is the n-1R. The round display is performed, and after the lapse of a predetermined period, the round display corresponding to the second round, which is the nR, is performed (after being determined as Yes in step 042AKS052, it is displayed in the process of step 042AKS061).

When it is determined in step 042AKS051 that the hit end designation command has been received (step 042AKS051; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets to end the big hit middle effect corresponding to the round in order to perform the ending effect (step 042AKS051). 042AKS067), clear n to 1 (step 042AKS068), and end various display processes.

Subsequently, display timings such as round number display and acquisition number display and examples of effect operations will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 10-6 to 10-14. In the illustrated example, the case where the so-called first hit (first big hit) is shown, not in the consecutive villas.

FIG. 10-6 is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the large winning opening, the timing of various displays, and the like. 10-7 to 10-14 are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation display in the image display device 5, an open / closed state of a large winning opening, and a lighting state of various lamps. As shown in FIGS. 10-6 and 10-7 (a-1), when the combination of the decorative symbols constituting the jackpot is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game state is reached. At this stage, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (b-1), the large winning opening is closed. Further, in order to notify the player that a big hit has occurred, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-1), the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, the speaker lamp 9eL, Various effect lamps 9 such as 9eR, the lower lamp 9f of the display device, and the general winning opening vicinity lamp 9g are turned on. In the illustrated example, the upper stage is the effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3, and the lower stage is the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2.

When it becomes a big hit, as shown in FIG. 10-6, a right-handed effect and a fanfare effect are performed to notify the player that the player should hit right until the predetermined period of the first round ends (Fig. 10-). Step 042AKS054) of step 5. The period from the jackpot shown in FIG. 10-6 to the start of the first R is a sufficiently longer period than the predetermined period. Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (a-2), the effect image of the fanfare is displayed on the image display device 5, and at the same time, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-2). All effect lamps 9 are temporarily turned off. Then, the effect lamp 9 is turned on in the order of the lower left side, the upper left side, the central portion, the upper right side, and the lower right side, and the right-handed effect of displaying "right-handed" on the image display device is performed. The small right-handed display displayed in the upper right portion of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 10-7 (a-2) may be continuously displayed during the big hit game state.

Specifically, in the right-handed effect, as shown in FIGS. 10-7 (a-3) to 10-10 (a-19), in the image display device 5, the "right-handed" image is superimposed on the fanfare image. The display continues. Therefore, the lighting order of the effect lamp 9 will be described below. When the right-handed effect is started, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-3), the general winning opening vicinity lamp 9g provided at the lower left of the game area is first lit, and then FIG. 10-7 (Fig. 10-7). As shown in c-4), the lower left lamp 9bL1, which is the frame lamp 9 in the lower left portion, lights up. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-5), of the display device lower lamps 9f provided at the lower position of the image display device 5 on the game board 2, the left side display device lower lamp 9fL is lit, and then the left side display device lower lamp 9fL is turned on. As shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-6), the upper left lamp 9bL2, which is the frame lamp 9 in the upper left portion, lights up, and as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-7), the speaker lamp corresponding to the speaker 8L portion. 9eL lights up. In this way, the effect lamps 9 are turned on in order from the lower left side to the upper left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (b-7), since the large winning opening is closed, the launched game medium does not win the large winning opening at this stage. In the example shown in FIG. 10-8 (b-7), the launched game ball passes through the second path of the upper part of the grand prize opening door and is guided to the discharge path.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-8), the movable body lamp 9d corresponding to the movable body 32 provided in the upper center portion of the game board 2 is turned on, and FIG. 10-8 (c-9). ), The main lamp 9 located above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3 is turned on, so that the effect lamp 9 provided in the upper center portion of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on.

Next, the speaker lamp 9eR corresponding to the speaker 8R portion is turned on as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-10), and then the frame lamp in the upper right portion is lit as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-11). The upper right lamp 9bR2, which is 9, is lit, and as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-12), the right display device of the display device lower lamp 9f provided at the lower position of the image display device 5 on the game board 2. The lower lamp 9fR lights up. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-13), the lower right lamp 9bR1 which is the frame lamp 9 in the lower right part is lit, and the attacker lamp 9c provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 is lit. To do. In this way, the effect lamps 9 are lit in order from the upper right side to the lower right side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a result, the effect lamp 9 lights up in order from the lower left side to the upper left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the central part, and then from the upper right side to the lower right side, so that the effect lamp 9 hits the player right. Right-handed production will be performed to suggest. In this example, both the effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3 and the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 are used to suggest right-handed striking. It may be. Further, only the effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3 lights from the lower left side to the center and the lower right side, and only the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 lights from the lower left side to the center and right. Both may be lit independently at the same time or with a time lag, such as lighting in the downward direction.

After the right-handed effect of the effect lamps 9 is completed, all the effect lamps 9 are turned off as shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-15). As shown in FIG. 10-9 (a-15), the right-handed display on the image display device 5 is continuously performed (the right-handed effect itself is being executed).

Next, when the opening timing of the large winning opening is reached as shown in FIG. 10-6, the first R is started, and the large winning opening is opened as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-16). At this stage, right-handed display on the image display device 5 is continuously performed as shown in FIG. 10-10 (a-16), and is shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-16) until a predetermined period elapses. As such, all effect lamps 9 remain off (same until FIGS. 10-10 (a-19) and (c-19)). Even if all the effect lamps 9 are not turned off, any of the indexes such as luminous intensity, brightness, and illuminance may be set to be lower than usual. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-16), even after the large winning opening is opened, until a predetermined period elapses, FIGS. 10-7 (c-3) to 10-9. As shown in (c-13), the effect lamps 9 may be turned on in sequence to suggest right-handed strikes. In this case, the lighting speed of each effect lamp may be faster than before the opening of the big winning opening (the lighting period may be shortened and the transition speed may be faster). Further, when the effect lamps 9 are sequentially turned on after the large winning opening is opened to suggest a right-handed strike, after the last lit attacker lamp 9c is turned on, it is shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-15). You may leave it on as it is without turning it off. According to this, the player can be made aware that the big winning opening has been opened.

Then, when the large winning opening is completely opened as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-17), the count of 0.6 seconds as a predetermined period corresponding to the first R is started, and FIG. 10-10 When the game ball wins the large winning opening as shown in (b-18), the game ball is detected by the count switch 23, and the winning designation command is transmitted from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side. It should be noted that the large winning opening is also open for the game ball (early hit game ball) launched by performing the right-handed effect before the first R is started (before the large winning opening is opened). If it exists in the upper part of the large winning opening at the timing, it becomes possible to win a prize within a predetermined period corresponding to the first R. On the side of the effect control board 12, the winning sound is output as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18) by the processing of step 042AKS058 in FIG. 10-5, and the winning sound is output as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-18). As shown in the above, the attacker lamp 9c is turned on in a manner of notifying that the prize has been won. As described above, the attacker lamp 9c emits light in a manner larger than the number of times of light emission per unit time of the game effect lamps 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c, which emits light in, for example, the big hit medium effect. In the example shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), the launched game ball passes through the first path, which is the path in the direction of the big winning opening, and is guided to the winning path provided with the count switch 23. An example is shown. The special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that the time until the game ball existing in the large winning opening door portion is detected by the count switch 23 is 0.6 seconds or less, which is a predetermined period. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball existing in the upper part of the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23 within a predetermined period from the opening of the big winning opening, and the game interest is lowered without giving the player anxiety. Can be prevented.

After the game ball has won the big prize opening as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), or after the state shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-17) has not been won, time has passed, and FIG. 10- When the predetermined period elapses as shown in 10 (a-19), (b-19) and (c-19), as shown in FIG. 10-6, the number of rounds corresponding to the 1st R is displayed and the jackpot medium effect is produced. Since it is the execution timing and the execution timing of the acquisition number display, the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 is executed.

Specifically, when the game ball wins the big prize opening before the lapse of a predetermined period as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-20), the first The number of rounds of "1R" indicating that it is one round is displayed, and the count-up display is performed. Further, at the same timing as these displays, as a big hit middle effect (1st R middle effect), as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-20), a decorative pattern constituting the big hit is displayed and "BOUNUS" is displayed. , And the character are displayed. It should be noted that the decorative symbols constituting the jackpot and the display of "during BOUNUS" displayed as the jackpot middle production (1st R middle production) are not shown (the same applies to FIGS. 10-20 described later). It is displayed in a manner suggesting that it should be right-handed as shown in 10-21. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-1), when a fanfare or a right-handed effect is performed and a predetermined period elapses after the big winning opening is opened, the big hit medium effect is shown in FIG. 10-21. As shown in (A-2), the design of "7", which is a decorative design constituting the jackpot, is displayed in a front-facing manner, and at the top of "B" in the "BOUNUS" display. A star-shaped image is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-3), the design of "7", which is a decorative design constituting the jackpot, is tilted toward the right back, and "in BOUNUS" is displayed. The star-shaped image shifts to the upper part of "O". Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-4), the design of "7", which is a decorative design constituting the jackpot, faces the front, and a star is placed above the "N" in the "BOUNUS" display. The shape image shifts. After that, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-5), the design of "7", which is a decorative design constituting the jackpot, is inclined toward the left back direction, and "U" in the "BOUNUS" display is displayed. The star-shaped image shifts to the top of. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-6), the symbol "7", which is a decorative symbol constituting the jackpot again, faces the front, and a star is placed above the "S" in the "BOUNUUS" display. The image of the shape shifts and returns to FIG. 10-21 (A-2). In this way, in the big hit medium production, the decorative patterns that make up the big hit are operated in the right back direction, the front, and the left back direction, and a star-shaped image is displayed from the left character of the "BOUNUS middle" display to the right. It suggests to the player that he should hit right by shifting. The operation display of the decorative pattern that constitutes the jackpot and the transition display of the star-shaped image are called effect display. In addition to this, for example, a predetermined image is rotated clockwise or the character is gradually displayed. Includes indications such as pointing to the right. That is, the effect display may be displayed in a manner suggesting right-handed striking. According to this, the effect display suggests that right-handed strikes should be made, and right-handed strikes can be easily recognized.

In the jackpot effect, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (c-20), the effect lamp 9 lights up according to a light emission pattern preset according to the jackpot effect. In this example, it is assumed that a light emitting pattern is set in which the effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3 and the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 are alternately lit. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-21), "0015" is displayed as the acquired number display. In this way, as shown in FIGS. 10-9 (c-16) to (c-19), the effect lamp 9 is not emitted until the large winning opening is opened and the predetermined period elapses. As shown in -11 (c-20) and (c-22), the effect lamp 9 is made to emit light after the display of the number of acquisitions after the lapse of a predetermined period is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the early hitting by the player and promote the firing timing.

On the other hand, when the predetermined period elapses without the game ball winning the big prize opening, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-22), the count-up display is not performed and the number of acquisitions is displayed as "0000". Is displayed. In addition, the point that the number of rounds of "1R" indicating that it is one round is displayed, and as the big hit middle production (1st R middle production), the decorative symbols constituting the big hit are displayed, "BOUNUS" is displayed, and The point that the character is displayed and the point that the effect lamp 9 lights up according to the light emission pattern set in advance according to the effect during the big hit are common regardless of whether or not a prize is won.

Next, as time elapses, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-23), when the tenth game ball wins the big winning opening in the first R, the upper limit at which the big winning opening can be opened. It will be a period. Along with the winning, the process of step 042AKS064 shown in FIG. 10-5 is executed, the count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. 10-12 (a-23), and FIG. 10-12 (a-24). As shown in the above, the number of acquired "0150" is displayed. Further, along with the winning, a winning sound is output as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-23), and in addition to lighting the effect lamp 9 corresponding to the effect during the big hit, FIG. 10-12 (c-23). ), The attacker lamp 9c lights up in a manner of notifying that the prize has been won. It should be noted that the upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened is a sufficient period even if it is counted after the lapse of a predetermined period for 10 game balls to win a prize. Specifically, the upper limit period is 29.5 seconds after opening, and is 28.9 seconds even after the elapse of a predetermined period. Since the continuous firing interval is 0.6 seconds, 10 prizes are sufficiently possible. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of security because sufficient time is secured for winning.

When the 10th game ball wins the big prize opening in the 1st R, the maximum period during which the big winning opening can be opened is reached. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-24), the large winning opening is opened. It is controlled to be closed. After that, during the period until the second R shown in FIG. 10-6 is started, the large winning opening is controlled to be completely closed as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-25). On the other hand, until the predetermined period of the second R elapses (from the time when n = 2 until the predetermined period elapses), as shown in FIG. 10-12 (a-25), the number of rounds corresponding to the first R is displayed. , The big hit production is continuously performed (the number of acquisitions is updated and displayed according to the winning), and the effect lamp 9 corresponds to the big hit production as shown in FIG. 10-12 (c-25). Lights up.

In the 1st R, when the 10th game ball wins the big winning opening and the upper limit period is reached, the big winning opening is controlled to be closed. At this time, the 11th game ball is controlled. In some cases, a so-called over-winning may occur in which the player wins a prize in the large winning opening following the tenth game ball. Even in the over-winning, the count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. 10-12 (a-23), and the number of acquired "0165" may be displayed. In this case, after the count-up display and the number of winnings are displayed according to the tenth prize, the count-up display and the number of winnings corresponding to the over-winning are displayed, but FIG. 10-12 (b-25). As shown in the above, the count-up display and the number of winnings display corresponding to the over-winning are completed within the period from the time when the large winning opening is completely closed to the time before the opening state corresponding to the second R is reached. Therefore, it is easy for the player to recognize that the over-winning has occurred in the first round, and the game interest can be improved. In addition, since the update of the number of acquisitions in the opening corresponding to the first round does not overlap with the update of the number of acquisitions in the opening corresponding to the second round, it is possible to determine which prize will be awarded corresponding to the opening of the round. It will be easy. Further, the winning sound corresponding to the over winning sound may be a sound different from the normal winning sound (over winning sound). In this case, when the winning value exceeds the upper limit value "10", the over winning sound may be output. Further, the attacker lamp 9c may also emit light in a mode corresponding to over-winning, unlike the light emission in the normal winning mode.

Then, corresponding to the second round, the timing is such that the large winning opening is opened again as shown in FIG. 10-6, and the large winning opening is opened again as shown in FIG. 10-13 (b-26). Is controlled to be. At this time, Yes is determined in step 042AKS065 of FIG. 10-5, that is, a command indicating the start of the n + 1R is received, and the process of 042AKS066 is executed, so that n = 2. Become. At this stage, since the process of step 042AKS055 in FIG. 10-5 is executed, as shown in FIGS. 10-13 (a-26) and (c-26), the big hit medium effect and the number of rounds corresponding to the first R are performed. The display is made (see also Figure 10-6).

Next, when the big winning opening is completely opened and the game ball wins the big winning opening as shown in FIG. 10-13 (b-27), unlike the case of the 1st R, the step of FIG. 10-5 In the process of 042AKS060, the count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. 10-13 (a-27), and the number of acquired "0165" is displayed as shown in FIG. 10-13 (a-28). Further, along with the winning, a winning sound is output as shown in FIG. 10-13 (b-27), and in addition to lighting the effect lamp 9 corresponding to the effect during the big hit, FIG. 10-13 (c-27). ), The attacker lamp 9c lights up. As described above, in the rounds other than the 1st R, the number of winnings is updated and displayed during the predetermined period even if the prize is won during the predetermined period. Then, when the predetermined period of the second R elapses, the process of step 042AKS061 of FIG. 10-5 is executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (a-30), "2R" indicating that the second round is performed. The number of rounds is displayed, and the big hit middle production corresponding to the 2nd R is executed. In this case, the number of "1" in the round number display of "1R" which is the first round is changed to "2". That is, "R" is continuously displayed from the first round. Further, the display of "1R" is continuously displayed until the predetermined period of the second R elapses. Further, in the feature unit 042AK of this embodiment, an example of executing a common big hit medium effect regardless of the number of rounds (the same applies to the lighting control of the effect effect lamp 9) is shown, but it is executed in each round. The production during the big hit may be different. The same applies to the lighting of the effect lamp 9. In this way, since the large winning opening is opened before the number of rounds indicating that it is the second round is displayed, the player's game ball that has been continuously fired from the first round is released at an early stage. You can get a prize in the big prize opening. Therefore, in each round of the plurality of round games, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game balls fired in succession are won in the large winning opening opened earlier than the round display.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10-13 (a-26), (b-26), and (c-26), the large winning opening is controlled to be open corresponding to the second R, and FIG. 10-13 (a-29). ), (B-29), and (c-29) show that when a predetermined period has passed without the game ball winning after the large winning opening is completely opened, FIG. 10-14 (a-31). ), (B-31), and (c-31), the number of acquisitions acquired in the first R is continuously displayed as it is. After that, the same processing is performed until the final round determined in advance, and when it is determined that the hit end designation command has been received in step 042AKS051 of FIG. 10-5, a big hit middle effect corresponding to the round is performed in order to perform the ending effect. Set to end. In this way, for the second and subsequent rounds, if the prize is not won during the predetermined period, the number of winnings displayed in the previous round is continuously displayed, while the prize is won during the predetermined period. Is displayed by adding the number of acquired balls to the number of acquired balls displayed in the previous round. Therefore, even after the second round, it is possible to easily recognize the winning of the big winning opening.

For example, in the final round, when the 10th game ball wins the big winning opening and the upper limit period is reached, the big winning opening is controlled to be closed. At this time, the 11th game is played. As shown in FIG. 10-15, the big hit game state may end while the ball is sandwiched between the special variable winning ball device 7 (more specifically, between the big winning door and the glass door frame 3a). .. In this case, at the start of the 1st R in the case of the next big hit (when the big winning opening corresponding to the 1st R is opened), the game ball will win the big winning opening, and during the predetermined period of the 1st R A game ball wins. Also in this case, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-18), the attacker lamp 9c is turned on in a manner of notifying that the winner has been won, and after the lapse of the predetermined period, FIGS. 10-11 (a-20) and FIG. As shown in (a-21), after performing the count-up display, "0015" may be displayed as the acquired number display. Further, in such a case, there is a possibility that the launched game ball will further win a prize during the predetermined period (the second ball may win a prize), and in that case, after the predetermined period has elapsed, FIG. 10-11 ( As shown in a-20) and (a-21), after the count-up display is performed, "0030" may be directly displayed without displaying "0000" or "0015" as the acquisition number display. According to this, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the game entertainment.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 042AK in this embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the number of acquisitions by the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 after a predetermined period after the large winning opening is opened and the first round is started. Then, if the game ball does not win the big prize opening within the predetermined period after the first round is started, a predetermined display indicating that the number of acquisitions has not increased is performed after the predetermined period, and the first round is performed. If a game ball wins a large prize opening within a predetermined period after the start of one round, the number of acquisitions is displayed as a specific display different from the predetermined display after the predetermined period. According to this, since the specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving anxiety to the player.

Further, when the game ball wins a large prize opening within a predetermined period after the start of the first round, the effect control CPU 120 directly specifies the number of acquisitions of "0000" as a predetermined display. Display the number of acquisitions of "0015" as a display. According to this, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused and to prevent the game from being enjoyed.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 performs a count-up display as a notification display that the number of acquisitions will increase if the game ball wins the large winning opening within a predetermined period after the first round is started. , Display the number of acquisitions of "0015" as a specific display. According to this, it is possible to easily recognize that there is a prize and the number of acquisitions increases.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 counts the timer value for a predetermined period from the timing of receiving the command indicating that the large winning opening is open, which is transmitted from the main board 11 side in response to the opening of the large winning opening. Is started, and the number of acquisitions is displayed after the lapse of a predetermined period. According to this, since the predetermined period is suitably counted and the specific display is performed when a prize is won within the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving anxiety to the player.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 closes the large winning opening door to guide the launched game ball through the second path of the upper part of the large winning opening door to the discharge path. By opening the winning opening door, the launched game ball is guided to the large winning opening through the first path and detected by the count switch 23. The special variable winning ball device 7 is configured such that the time until the game ball existing in the large winning opening door portion is detected by the count switch 23 is 0.6 seconds or less, which is a predetermined period. .. According to this, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball existing in the upper part of the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23 within a predetermined period from the opening of the big winning opening, and the game is enjoyed without giving the player anxiety. Can be prevented from decreasing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-6, the effect control CPU 120 strikes right as shown in FIG. 10-7 (a-3) between the time when the big hit is reached and the time when the big winning opening is opened. By performing the production, the player is informed that he / she should hit right. According to this, since the game area to be launched during the big hit is suggested, the game method can be easily recognized and the game interest can be improved.

The open state of the large winning opening is a state in which the large winning opening is completely open, that is, the large winning opening is moved to a position where the large winning opening is completely open, and the large winning opening is opened. A command for specifying that the large winning opening is open is transmitted from the side of the main board 11 in response to the detection that the vehicle has moved to a completely open state. According to this, since the predetermined period is counted after the large winning opening is completely opened, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving anxiety to the player.

In addition, the big winning opening is also open for the game ball (early hit game ball) launched by performing the right-handed effect before the first R is started (before the big winning opening is opened). If it exists in the upper part of the large winning opening at the timing, it is possible to win a prize within a predetermined period corresponding to the first R, and if a prize is won within the predetermined period, the effect control CPU 120 is specified after the predetermined period. The number of acquisitions is displayed as a display. According to this, it is possible to prevent the game ball hit early from being wasted.

Further, for example, in the final round, when the 10th game ball wins the big winning opening and the upper limit period is reached, the big winning opening is controlled to be closed. At this time, the 11th game is played. As shown in FIG. 10-15, the big hit game state may end while the ball is sandwiched between the special variable winning ball device 7 (more specifically, between the big winning door and the glass door frame 3a). .. In this case, at the start of the 1st R in the case of the next big hit (when the big winning opening corresponding to the 1st R is opened), the game ball will win the big winning opening, and during the predetermined period of the 1st R When a game ball is won, the effect control CPU 120 displays the number of acquisitions as a specific display after the lapse of the predetermined period. According to this, it is possible to prevent the dissatisfaction felt by the player when an irregular event occurs.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a fanfare effect suggesting that the big hit game state has been reached from the closed state to the open state of the big winning opening. Then, after the big winning opening is opened and a predetermined period has passed, the number of rounds is displayed together with the number of acquisitions, and it is possible to perform a big hit middle production corresponding to the round game. According to this, it is possible to improve the game entertainment by adding sharpness to the production.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), the effect control CPU 120 is used when a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening during a predetermined period after the large winning opening is opened. As shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-18), the attacker lamp 9c is turned on. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-23), even when a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening other than the predetermined period, the attacker lamp is also shown in FIG. 10-12 (c-23). Turn on 9c. According to this, since the specific display is performed when the prize is won within the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving anxiety to the player, and it is possible to visually recognize that the prize has been won within the predetermined period. It will be easier.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 emits light from the attacker lamp 9c in the process of step 042AKS058 in FIG. 10-5 (the same applies to step 042AKS064), for example, a unit of the game effect lamp 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c that emits light in the big hit medium effect. Light is emitted in a mode that is greater than the number of light emission per hour (a mode for notifying that a prize has been won). According to this, it becomes easy to visually recognize that the game ball has won the big prize opening, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), the effect control CPU 120 is concerned when a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening during a predetermined period after the large winning opening is opened. Outputs the winning sound corresponding to the winning. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-23), even when a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening other than the predetermined period, a winning sound corresponding to the winning is output. According to this, it becomes easy to recognize that the game ball has won the big prize opening, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 also displays the number of rounds corresponding to the first and subsequent rounds in the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 after a predetermined period after the start of the round. Do. According to this, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a deterioration of the game interest without giving anxiety to the player, and in each round of a plurality of round games, It is possible to increase the possibility of winning consecutively fired game balls in the large winning opening opened earlier than the round display.

Further, in the effect control CPU 120, when the second and subsequent round games are performed, if the game medium does not win the big winning opening within a predetermined period after the big winning opening is opened, the figure is shown in the figure. As shown in 10-14 (a-31), when the number of acquisitions displayed in the previous round game is continuously displayed, while the game medium wins the big prize opening within the predetermined period. Is displayed by adding the number of winning balls given in response to the winning from the winning number display displayed in the previous round game, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (a-30). According to this, it is possible to easily recognize the winning of the big winning opening even after the second round.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the count-up display as shown in FIG. 10-12 (a-23) even when an over-winning occurs, and displays the number of acquisitions of "0165". In this case, after the count-up display and the number of winnings are displayed according to the tenth prize, the count-up display and the number of winnings corresponding to the over-winning are displayed, but FIG. 10-12 (b-25). As shown in the above, the count-up display and the number of winnings display corresponding to the over-winning are completed within the period from the time when the large winning opening is completely closed to the time before the opening state corresponding to the second R is reached. According to this, since the update of the acquired number display at the time of one opening does not overlap with the update of the acquired number display at the next opening, it becomes easy to determine which opening corresponds to the winning.

Further, in the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-18), the game is played during a predetermined period after the large winning opening is opened, that is, in a situation where the number of acquisitions is not displayed. Although the attacker lamp 9c only lights up when the ball wins the big prize opening, in the situation where the number of acquisitions after the lapse of the predetermined period is displayed, for example, FIG. 10-11 (c-20) and ( As shown in c-21), the effect lamps 9 provided on the frame 3 for the multi-game machine and the effect lamps 9 provided on the game board 2 are alternately turned on, and more than during the predetermined period. The effect lamp 9 emits light. According to this, since the specific display is performed when a prize is won within the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving anxiety to the player, and the number of acquisitions after the predetermined period is displayed. It is possible to liven up the production after that and improve the game entertainment.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-6, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a right-handed effect and a fanfare effect before the start of the first round, and even after the large winning opening is opened, a predetermined period of time is reached. The effect lamps 9 may be turned on in sequence as shown in FIGS. 10-7 (c-3) to 10-9 (c-13) to suggest right-handed strikes, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. As shown in FIGS. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-21), for example, the effect lamp 9 provided in the frame 3 for the double-game machine and the effect effect provided in the game board 2. The lamps 9 are turned on alternately. According to this, it is possible to suggest right-handed striking by using the effect lamp 9. Further, when the effect lamps 9 are sequentially turned on after the large winning opening is opened to suggest a right-handed strike, after the last lit attacker lamp 9c is turned on, it is shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-15). The lights may be turned on as they are without being turned off as in the above-mentioned manner, and according to this, the player can be made aware that the big winning opening is in the open state.

In addition, the upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened is a sufficient period even if it is counted after the lapse of a predetermined period for 10 game balls to win a prize. According to this, it is possible to give the player a sense of security because sufficient time is secured for winning.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 is as shown in FIGS. 10-9 (c-16) to (c-19) until the large winning opening is opened and a predetermined period elapses, that is, until the number of acquisitions is displayed. In addition, the effect lamp 9 is not emitted, and as shown in FIGS. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the effect lamp 9 is emitted after the display of the number of acquisitions after the lapse of a predetermined period is displayed. Let me. According to this, it is possible to suppress the early hitting by the player and promote the firing timing.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the effect control CPU 120 emits the effect lamp 9 at the same timing as the execution timing of the effect during the big hit after the elapse of a predetermined period. Let me. According to this, the production can be excited at once at the timing when the production during the big hit is executed, and the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-21, the effect control CPU 120 suggests right-handed effect display that shifts and displays a decorative pattern or a star-shaped image constituting a big hit at the timing when the number of acquisitions is displayed. Perform in a mode. According to this, the effect display suggests that the player should hit the right side, and the player can easily recognize that the player should hit the right side.

(Modification example of feature part 042AK)
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-9 (a-15), (b-15), and (c-15), the effect lamps 9 are turned on in order, suggesting that the effect lamp 9 should be right-handed. An example is shown in which all the effect lamps 9 are turned off after the right-handed effect by the effect lamp 9 is completed, but this is an example. For example, after the states shown in FIGS. 10-9 (a-15), (b-15), and (c-15), FIGS. 10-16 (a-16A), (b-16A), (c-16A). As shown in FIG. 10-16 (c-16A) at the timing (FIG. 10-16 (b-16A)) when the state shifts to the state shown in (1) and the large winning opening is opened (FIG. 10-16 (b-16A)), the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7 The attacker lamp 9c provided at the position may be turned on. According to this, the player can easily visually recognize that the big winning opening is in the open state. The attacker lamp 9c may be continuously lit until a predetermined period elapses or during the opening period.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the round display is updated from the first round to the second round, the number of "1" in the number of rounds of "1R" which is the first round is changed to "2". , "R" is continuously displayed from the first round, and "1R" is continuously displayed until the predetermined period of the second R elapses, but this is just an example. is there. For example, as shown in FIG. 10-17, the display of "1" in the display of "1R" is deleted at the end of the open state corresponding to the first round, that is, at the timing when the big winning opening is closed. , "R" may be displayed only. Then, "2" may be displayed at the timing when the predetermined period of the second R has elapsed, and the round display of "2R" indicating that it is the second round may be performed. The same applies to the second and subsequent rounds. According to this, the end of each round can be visually recognized, and the game can be sharpened.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the number of winnings that is the upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened is 10 (the upper limit winning number is 10). For example, the upper limit winning is set to 1. , If two pieces are entered during the predetermined period before the number of rounds is displayed, an over prize may be given. In this case, as the over-winning winning sound during the predetermined period, a sound different from the normal winning sound (over-winning sound) may be output, and the attacker lamp 9c may also emit light in a manner indicating the occurrence of over-winning. ..

Further, in the above embodiment, an example of counting the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening is shown for displaying the number of acquisitions, but in addition to this, the winning to the general winning opening 10 during the big hit is also counted. May be good. Since right-handed hits are made during the big hit, the general winning opening for winning is the general winning opening 10 provided above the variable winning ball device 6B. FIG. 10-18 is a flowchart showing an example of various display processes in the case of counting the winning of the general winning opening 10 during the big hit. The same part as in FIG. 10-5 will not be described.

In the various display processes shown in FIGS. 10-18, when it is determined in step 042AKS056 that the prize designation command has not been received (step 042AKS056; No), a general prize indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the general prize opening 10 is further obtained. It is determined whether or not the designated command has been received (step 042AKS081). Then, when the general winning designation command is received, that is, when the general winning opening 10 is won (step 042AKS081; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 adds "3" to the count value of the number of acquired balls (step 042AKS081; Yes). Step 042AKS082). After executing the process of step 042AKS082, or when the general winning designation command has not been received, that is, when there is no winning in the general winning opening 10 (step 042AKS081; No), the process proceeds to the process of step 042AKS059. In addition, along with winning the general winning opening 10, a winning sound indicating that the game ball has won the general winning opening 10 (a winning sound different from the case where the large winning opening is won) may be output.

Further, in the various display processes shown in FIGS. 10-18, when it is determined in step 042AKS062 that the winning designation command has not been received (step 042AKS062; No), it further indicates that the game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening 10. It is determined whether or not the general prize designation command has been received (step 042AKS083). Then, when the general winning designation command is received, that is, when the general winning opening 10 is won (step 042AKS083; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 adds "3" to the count value of the number of acquired balls (step 042AKS083; Yes). Step 042AKS083), the number of acquisitions is updated and displayed (step 042AKS085). Even when the acquisition number update display in step 042AKS085 is performed, the acquisition number display is performed after the count-up display (notification display that the acquisition number increases) is performed. After executing the process of step 042AKS085, or when the general winning designation command has not been received, that is, when there is no winning in the general winning opening 10 (step 042AKS083; No), the process proceeds to the process of step 042AKS065. In addition, along with winning the general winning opening 10, a winning sound indicating that the game ball has won the general winning opening 10 (a winning sound different from the case where the large winning opening is won) may be output.

Subsequently, an example of the effect operation in the case of counting the winning of the general winning opening 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-19 and 10-20. 10-19 and 10-20 are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation display in the image display device 5, an open / closed state of a large winning opening, and a lighting state of various lamps. (A-16), (b-16), (c-16), (a-17), (b-17), and (c-17) shown in FIG. 10-19 are shown in FIG. 10-10 ( The same applies to a-16), (b-16), (c-16), (a-17), (b-17), and (c-17). As shown in the figure, when the big winning opening is opened, the counting of 0.6 seconds as a predetermined period is started. When the game ball wins the general winning opening 10, the state shifts to the states shown in FIGS. 10-19 (a-18A), (b-18A), and (c-18A). Then, after the game ball has won the general winning opening 10 as shown in FIG. 10-19 (b-18A), or from the state shown in FIG. 10-19 (b-17), the game ball is also generally used in the large winning opening. When time elapses without winning the winning opening 10 and a predetermined period elapses as shown in FIGS. 10-19 (a-19A), (b-19A) and (c-19A), the game ball wins a general prize. When a prize is won in the mouth 10, the state shifts to the state shown in FIGS. 10-20 (a-20A), (b-20A), and (c-20A), and as shown in FIG. 10-20 (a-20A). , The number of rounds of "1R" indicating that it is the first round is displayed, and the count-up display is performed. Further, at the same timing as these displays, as a big hit middle effect (1st R middle effect), as shown in FIG. 10-20 (a-20A), a decorative pattern constituting the big hit is displayed or "BOUNUS is in progress" is displayed. , And the character are displayed. In the jackpot effect, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (c-20A), the effect lamp 9 lights up according to a light emission pattern preset according to the jackpot effect. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (a-21A), "0003" is displayed as the number of acquisitions.

On the other hand, when the predetermined period elapses without the game ball winning the general winning opening 10, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (a-22A), the count-up display is not performed and the number of acquisitions is displayed as "0000". Is displayed. In addition, the point that the number of rounds of "1R" indicating that it is one round is displayed, and as the big hit middle production (1st R middle production), the decorative symbols constituting the big hit are displayed, "BOUNUS" is displayed, and The point that the character is displayed and the point that the effect lamp 9 lights up according to the light emission pattern set in advance according to the effect during the big hit are common regardless of whether or not a prize is won.

As described above, even when the game ball wins the general winning opening 10 during the predetermined period after the large winning opening is opened at the start of the first round, the predetermined setting is the same as in the above embodiment. After the elapse of the period, "0003" is displayed as the number of acquisitions in response to the winning of the general winning opening 10. If no game ball is also won in the general winning opening 10 during the predetermined period, "0000" is displayed as a predetermined display indicating that the prize ball has not been awarded. Therefore, even for the game balls that have won the general winning opening 10 during the predetermined period, the number of winnings corresponding to the winning is displayed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being anxious.

(Explanation of Means Related to Feature 042AK)
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 042AK is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Display means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for instructing the display contents on the image display device 5) and
A variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that can change the game medium into a first state in which the game medium is easy to win and a second state in which the game medium is impossible or difficult to win.
A control means (for example, a control means capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state a plurality of times when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state. CPU103 that performs round games, etc.)
The display means
It is possible to display the grant amount display regarding the grant amount of the game value given by the game medium winning the variable winning means (for example, displaying the number of acquisitions).
When the first round game of the plurality of round games is performed, the grant amount display is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. (For example, in the first round, the number of winnings will be displayed after a predetermined period has passed after the big winning opening is opened),
When the game medium does not win the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value is not given is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, the number of acquisitions). Display "0000" as a display, etc.),
When the game medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, "0015" is displayed as the acquisition number display. Etc.),
It is characterized by that.

According to such a configuration, since the specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a deterioration of the game interest without giving anxiety to the player.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
When the game medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period, the display means displays the specific display without displaying the predetermined display (for example, "0015" is displayed instead of displaying "0000". Display etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused and to prevent the game from being enjoyed.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
When the game medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period, the display means performs a count-up display indicating that the game value is given, and then the display means is given as the specific display. Display according to the value for the game (for example, "0015" is displayed after the count-up display, which is a notification display that the number of acquisitions is increasing), is displayed.
You may do so.

With such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that there is a prize and the number of acquisitions increases.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above.
The display means starts displaying the grant amount display after the elapse of the predetermined period after receiving the command indicating that the variable winning means has changed from the second state to the first state (for example, on the main board 11). Starting counting the timer value for a predetermined period from the timing when the specified command is received during the opening of the big winning opening sent from the side),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, since a predetermined period is suitably counted and a specific display is performed when a prize is won within the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a deterioration of the game interest without giving anxiety to the player.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above.
The variable winning means passes through the first path (for example, by opening the large winning opening door, the launched game ball passes through the first path) that guides the game medium to the winning path in the first state. (For example, leading to the big winning opening) and the second path leading the game medium to the discharge path in the second state (for example, by closing the big winning opening door, the launched game ball is made large. A route forming means including a second path in the upper part of the winning opening door to lead to a discharge path, and a detecting means formed in the winning path to detect the winning of the game medium (for example, the count switch 23). Etc.), including,
The time from the path forming means to the detection means of the game medium is within the predetermined period (for example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, until the game ball existing in the large winning opening door portion is detected by the count switch 23). Time is configured to be 0.6 seconds or less, which is a predetermined period),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball existing in the upper part of the large winning opening is detected within a predetermined period from the opening of the large winning opening, and the player can enjoy the game without giving anxiety. It is possible to prevent a decrease.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above.
After being controlled to the advantageous state and before the variable winning means becomes the first state, an operation promotion display for promoting the operation is performed to the player (for example, the big winning opening is opened after the big hit. In the meantime, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (a-3), a right-handed effect is performed to indicate to the player that the player should be right-handed),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, since the operation to be performed during the advantageous state is suggested, the game method can be easily recognized and the game interest can be improved.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above.
The first state is a state in which the variable winning door included in the variable winning means is completely opened (for example, the open state of the large winning opening means that the large winning opening is completely open. That is, the main board 11 is in a state where the large prize opening door has been moved to a position where it is completely open, and corresponds to the detection that the large prize entrance door has been moved to a position where it is completely open. A designated command is sent from the side while the big winning door is open),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, since the predetermined period is counted after the large winning opening is completely opened, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving anxiety to the player.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above.
When the game medium launched by performing the operation promotion display wins the variable winning means before the first round game in the advantageous state is started, the identification is performed after the lapse of the predetermined period. Display the display (for example, a game ball launched by performing a right-handed effect before the start of the 1st R can win a prize at the timing when the large winning opening is opened, and wins within the predetermined period. If so, the number of acquisitions will be displayed as a specific display after a predetermined period),
You may do so.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game medium launched before the start of the round game from being wasted.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above.
In the last round game of the plurality of round games in the advantageous state, when the variable winning means changes from the first state to the second state, the advantageous state is held with the game medium sandwiched between them. Finished (for example, in the final round, the eleventh game ball was sandwiched between the special variable winning ball device 7 (more specifically, between the large winning door and the glass door frame 3a) as shown in FIG. 10-15). The jackpot game state ends in the state),
In the first round game when the advantageous state is controlled again, the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state, so that the game medium in the sandwiched state wins the variable winning means. In this case, the specific display is displayed after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, the game ball wins the big prize opening at the start of the first R in the case of the next big hit, and the number of acquisitions as the specific display after the lapse of the predetermined period. Display etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the dissatisfaction felt by the player when an irregular event occurs.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9) above.
It is possible to execute a suggestion effect that is controlled to the advantageous state and suggests that the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state until the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state (for example, a large prize). From the closed state to the open state of the mouth, it is possible to execute a fanfare effect suggesting that the game is in a big hit game state), and it is executed when the display of the given amount display starts after the lapse of the predetermined period. It is possible to execute a round game display that can identify the round game and a production during the round corresponding to the round game (for example, after the large winning opening is open and a predetermined period has passed, the number of rounds is displayed together with the number of acquisitions. It is possible to perform a big hit production corresponding to round games, etc.),

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment by adding sharpness to the production.

(Explanation of Means Related to Feature 043AK)
The feature unit 042AK includes the following feature unit 043AK.
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 043AK is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Display means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for instructing the display contents on the image display device 5) and
A variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that can change the game medium into a first state in which the game medium is easy to win and a second state in which the game medium is impossible or difficult to win.
A control means (for example, a control means capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state a plurality of times when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state. CPU103 that performs round games, etc.)
The display means
It is possible to display the grant amount display regarding the grant amount of the game value given by the game medium winning the variable winning means (for example, displaying the number of acquisitions).
When the first round game of the plurality of round games is performed, the grant amount display is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. (For example, in the first round, the number of winnings will be displayed after a predetermined period has passed after the big winning opening is opened),
When the game medium does not win the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value is not given is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, the number of acquisitions). Display "0000" as a display, etc.),
When the game medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, "0015" is displayed as the acquisition number display. Etc.),
Light emitting means (for example, effect lamp 9) and
A light emitting control means (for example, a production control CPU 120) for controlling the light emitting means is further provided.
In the light emission control means, the game medium wins a prize when the game medium wins the variable winning means after the lapse of the predetermined period and when the game medium wins the variable winning means before the lapse of the predetermined period. The light emitting means is controlled by the light emitting pattern corresponding to (for example, when a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening, the attacker lamp 9c is made to emit light regardless of whether or not the winning is within a predetermined period).
It is characterized by that.

According to such a configuration, since the specific display is performed when the prize is won within the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving anxiety to the player, and the prize is won within the predetermined period. Is easier to see.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The light emitting means includes a specific light emitting means (for example, an attacker lamp 9c) located in the vicinity of the variable winning means that emits light when the game medium wins the variable winning means, and a predetermined light emitting means other than the specific light emitting means (for example, the attacker lamp 9c). For example, an effect lamp 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c) and
When the game medium wins the variable winning means, the light emission of the specific light emitting means has a larger number of light emission per unit time than the light emission of the predetermined light emitting means (for example, the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c in the process of step 042AKS058 (step). 042AKS064 is also the same), in a mode that is greater than the number of light emission per unit time of the game effect lamp 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c that emits light during the jackpot production (a mode that notifies that a prize has been won, etc.),
You may do so.

According to this configuration, it becomes easy to visually recognize that the game ball has won the big prize opening, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
Further equipped with sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.)
The sound output means
When the game medium wins a prize in the variable winning means, a winning sound corresponding to the winning is output.
When the game medium wins the variable winning means after the lapse of the predetermined period, or when the game medium wins the variable winning means before the lapse of the predetermined period, the winning sound is output (for example, the game is played in the large winning opening). When the ball wins, the winning sound is output regardless of whether the winning is within the specified period),
You may do so.

According to this configuration, it becomes easy to recognize that the game ball has won the big prize opening, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

(Explanation of Means Concerning Feature 044AK)
The feature unit 042AK includes the following feature unit 044AK.
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 044AK is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Display means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for instructing the display contents on the image display device 5) and
A variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that can change the game medium into a first state in which the game medium is easy to win and a second state in which the game medium is impossible or difficult to win.
A control means (for example, a control means capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state a plurality of times when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state. CPU103 that performs round games, etc.)
The display means
It is possible to display the grant amount display regarding the grant amount of the game value given by the game medium winning the variable winning means (for example, displaying the number of acquisitions).
It is possible to display a round game display that can identify the round game being executed (for example, display the number of rounds).
When the first round game of the plurality of round games is performed, the given amount display and the first after a predetermined period has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. The round game display corresponding to the round game is displayed (for example, in the first round, the number of rounds and the number of acquisitions are displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the large winning opening is opened).
When the second and subsequent round games are performed among the plurality of round games, the second and subsequent times after the lapse of the predetermined period after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. The round game display corresponding to the round game is displayed (for example, in the second round, the number of rounds is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the large winning opening is opened).
When the game medium does not win the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value is not given is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, the number of acquisitions). Display "0000" as a display, etc.),
When the game medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, "0015" is displayed as the acquisition number display. Etc.),
It is characterized by that.

According to this configuration, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a deterioration in the game interest without giving anxiety to the player, and in each round of a plurality of round games. , It is possible to increase the possibility of winning consecutively fired game balls in the large winning opening opened earlier than the round display.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
When the second and subsequent round games are performed, if the game medium does not win the variable winning means within a predetermined period after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. , The grant amount display displayed in the previous round game is continuously displayed (for example, within a predetermined period after the large winning opening is opened when the second and subsequent round games are performed). If the game medium does not win the big prize opening, the number of acquisitions displayed in the previous round game is continuously displayed as shown in FIG. 10-14 (a-31)),
When the second and subsequent round games are performed, if the game medium wins the variable winning means within a predetermined period after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. , From the grant amount display displayed in the previous round game, the grant amount corresponding to the game value given in response to the winning is added and displayed (for example, the game medium is displayed within a predetermined period). When a prize is won in the large winning opening, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (a-30), the winning balls given in response to the winning from the number of winnings displayed in the previous round game are displayed. Add numbers and display),
You may do so.

According to this configuration, it is possible to easily recognize the winning of the large winning opening even in the second and subsequent round games.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
The display means can update and display the grant amount display being displayed in response to the game medium winning the variable winning means.
The update display of the grant amount display is completed until the variable winning means changes from the first state to the second state and then changes to the first state again (for example, the large winning opening is completely closed). After that, the count-up display and the number of acquisitions corresponding to the over-winning will be completed within the period before the open state corresponding to the 2nd R),
You may do so.

According to this configuration, since the update of the acquisition number display at the time of one opening does not overlap with the update of the acquisition number display at the next opening, it becomes easy to determine which opening corresponds to the winning. ..

(Explanation of Means Concerning Feature 045AK)
The feature unit 042AK includes the following feature unit 045AK.
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 045AK is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Display means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for instructing the display contents on the image display device 5) and
A variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that can change the game medium into a first state in which the game medium is easy to win and a second state in which the game medium is impossible or difficult to win.
A control means (for example, a control means capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state a plurality of times when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state. CPU103 that performs round games, etc.)
The display means
It is possible to display the grant amount display regarding the grant amount of the game value given by the game medium winning the variable winning means (for example, displaying the number of acquisitions).
When the first round game of the plurality of round games is performed, the grant amount display is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. (For example, in the first round, the number of winnings will be displayed after a predetermined period has passed after the big winning opening is opened),
When the game medium does not win the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value is not given is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, the number of acquisitions). Display "0000" as a display, etc.),
When the game medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, "0015" is displayed as the acquisition number display. Etc.),
With a plurality of light emitting means (for example, effect lamp 9),
A light emitting control means (for example, a production control CPU 120) for controlling the light emitting means is further provided.
The light emission control means is such that the variable winning means is in the first state when the variable winning means is in the first state and the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period is displayed. Control is performed to make more of the light emitting means emit light than when the imparted amount display is not displayed before the elapse of the predetermined period (for example, during the predetermined period, that is, in a situation where the acquired number is not displayed, FIG. 10- As shown in 10 (c-18), the attacker lamp 9c only lights up when the game ball wins the big prize opening, but in the situation where the number of acquisitions after the lapse of the predetermined period is displayed, the number of acquisitions is displayed. For example, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-21), the effect lamp 9 provided on the frame 3 for the double-game machine and the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 are used. The lamps are turned on alternately to emit more light from the effect lamp 9 than during the predetermined period),
It is characterized by that.

According to such a configuration, since the specific display is performed when the prize is won within the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving anxiety to the player, and the number of acquisitions after the predetermined period is displayed. It is possible to liven up the production after the event is performed and improve the game entertainment.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
It is possible to display an operation promotion display for promoting the operation to the player (for example, right-handed display) after the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state and before the variable winning means is in the first state.
The light emitting means includes a specific light emitting means (for example, an attacker lamp 9c) located in the vicinity of the variable winning means that emits light when the game medium wins the variable winning means, and a predetermined light emitting means other than the specific light emitting means (for example, the attacker lamp 9c). For example, an effect lamp 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c) and
When the variable winning means is in the first state, when the given amount display before the elapse of the predetermined period is not displayed, the predetermined light emitting means corresponds to the operation promotion display while emitting the specific light emitting means. The light is emitted in a light emitting pattern, and when the given amount display after the elapse of the predetermined period is displayed, the specific light emitting means and the predetermined light emitting means are made to emit light in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the round game (for example, the big winning opening). After being opened, the effect lamps 9 are sequentially turned on as shown in FIGS. 10-7 (c-3) to 10-9 (c-13) until a predetermined period elapses to suggest right-handed strikes. After the lapse of a predetermined period, for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-21), the effect lamp 9 and the game board 2 provided in the frame 3 for the multi-game machine are provided. When the effect lamps 9 are turned on alternately and the effect lamps 9 are sequentially turned on after the big winning opening is opened to suggest a right-handed strike, after the last lit attacker lamp 9c is turned on, the figure is shown in the figure. Do not turn off the lights as shown in 10-9 (c-15), but leave them on as they are),
You may do so.

According to this configuration, the operation can be promoted by using the predetermined light emitting means, and the player can be made aware that the variable winning means is in the first state.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
In the round game, when a specific number of game media wins, one of the round games ends, and the game shifts to the next round game (for example, when 10 game balls win, the big winning opening is opened. It will be the upper limit period that can be done, etc.),
The time from the lapse of the predetermined period until the variable winning means enters the second state is a sufficient time for the game medium to win the specific number (for example, the upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened). Is a sufficient period to count 10 game balls after a predetermined period has passed),
You may do so.

According to this configuration, a sufficient time is secured for winning, so that the player can feel reassured.

(4) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
In the round game, when a specific number of game media wins, one of the round games ends, and the game shifts to the next round game (for example, when 10 game balls win, the big winning opening is opened. It will be the upper limit period that can be done, etc.),
The time from the lapse of the predetermined period until the variable winning means enters the second state is a sufficient time for the game medium to win the specific number (for example, the upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened). Is a sufficient period to count 10 game balls after a predetermined period has passed),
When the variable winning means is in the first state, the light emission of the light emitting means is restricted when the given amount display before the elapse of the predetermined period is not displayed, and the given amount display after the elapse of the predetermined period is displayed. After the display, the light emitting means is made to emit light (for example, until the large winning opening is opened and a predetermined period elapses, that is, until the number of winnings is displayed, FIGS. 10-9 (c-16) to (c-19). ), The effect lamp 9 is not emitted, and as shown in FIGS. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the effect is displayed after the number of acquisitions after the lapse of a predetermined period is displayed. Make the lamp 9 emit light, etc.),
You may do so.

According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from hitting quickly and promote the firing timing.

(5) In the gaming machine described in (4) above,
It is possible to execute a suggestion effect that is controlled to the advantageous state and suggests that the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state until the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state (for example, a fanfare effect). Is possible, etc.), and at the same time as the display of the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period is started, it is possible to execute the round game display that can identify the round game being executed and the in-round effect corresponding to the round game. (For example, the number of rounds is displayed, the number of acquisitions is displayed, and the big hit production is performed after a predetermined period of time).
The light emitting means is made to emit light at the same timing as the execution timing of the effect during the round (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the timing is the same as the execution timing of the effect during the big hit. (For example, make the effect lamp 9 emit light),
You may do so.

According to this configuration, the production can be excited at once at the timing when the production is executed during the round, and the game entertainment can be improved.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above.
Further equipped with general winning means (for example, general winning opening 10) capable of winning a game medium,
The display means
It is possible to display the amount of the game value given by the game medium winning the general winning means as the given amount display (for example, the winning number display is displayed corresponding to the winning to the general winning opening 10). Etc.),
When the game medium does not win the general prize means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value is not given is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, the predetermined period). If the game ball does not win in the general winning opening 10, "0000" is displayed as a predetermined display indicating that the prize ball has not been given),
When the game medium wins the general winning means within the predetermined period, a display corresponding to winning the general winning means is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, the large winning opening is open). If a game ball wins in the general winning opening 10 during the predetermined period after that, "0003" is displayed as the number of winnings in response to the winning in the general winning opening 10 after the lapse of the predetermined period. Etc.),
You may do so.

According to this configuration, even when the general winning means is won during the predetermined period, the display corresponding to the winning of the general winning means is displayed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being anxious.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above.
The variable winning means is provided in a predetermined area in the game area (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7 is provided in the game area on the right side).
The display means
It is possible to display the first image (for example, a decorative pattern constituting a big hit) at the same timing as the above-mentioned grant amount display.
The first image is effect-displayed at the same timing as the grant amount display in the advantageous state (for example, an effect display for operating a decorative symbol constituting a big hit is performed).
The effect display is displayed in a mode suggesting the predetermined area (for example, as an effect display, the decorative symbols constituting the jackpot are operated in the right-back direction, the front, and the left-back direction to be displayed in a mode suggesting right-handed striking. Such),
You may do so.

According to this configuration, the effect display suggests a game area to be fired, and it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the game area to be fired.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiment examples described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is another gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Display means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for instructing the display contents on the image display device 5) and
A variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that can change the game medium into a first state in which the game medium is easy to win and a second state in which the game medium is impossible or difficult to win.
A control means (for example, a control means capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state a plurality of times when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state. CPU103 that performs round games, etc.)
The display means
It is possible to display the grant amount display regarding the grant amount of the game value given by the game medium winning the variable winning means (for example, displaying the number of acquisitions).
When the first round game of the plurality of round games is performed, the grant amount display is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. (For example, in the first round, the number of winnings will be displayed after a predetermined period has passed after the big winning opening is opened),
When the game medium does not win the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value is not given is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, the number of acquisitions). Display "0000" as a display, etc.),
When the game medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period, the specific display is displayed without displaying the predetermined display (for example, "0015" is displayed instead of displaying "0000").
further,
Hold storage means (for example, hold information storage area for effect control) that can store information related to variable display as hold information, and
When controlled to the advantageous state, a notification effect (for example, hold continuous notification) for notifying that the hold information corresponding to the control to the advantageous state is stored in the hold storage means can be executed. The effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of step 010AKS004 and step 010AKS007) and
By executing the notification effect, the specific display means capable of displaying the specific display (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 010AKS007) and
An erasing effect executing means (for example, step 010AKS024) capable of executing a specific display erasing effect (for example, erasing effect) for erasing the specific display at a predetermined timing (for example, timing TA, TB, or TC) of the variable display corresponding to the specific display. The effect control CPU 120) that executes the process of step 010AKS025 is provided.
If the specific display is not erased at the predetermined timing due to a predetermined event (for example, an error in the omission of the fluctuation pattern command or the deletion effect setting process) while the specific display is displayed, the specific display is not deleted at the predetermined timing. A gaming machine capable of executing a special control for erasing the specific display at a later specific timing (for example, timing TD) (for example, the processing of step 010AKS045 can be executed) can be mentioned.
According to this feature, since the special display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving anxiety to the player. Further, according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being distrusted by the continuous display of the specific display, and it is possible to preferably execute the notification effect.

That is, after a predetermined period has elapsed after the variable winning means has changed from the second state to the first state, a predetermined display (when the prize is not won within the predetermined period) or a special display (winning within the predetermined period) is displayed as the grant amount display. When) is displayed, the amount of grant can be preferably displayed to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game, and when the specific display is displayed, the specific display is not deleted at a predetermined timing to be deleted. Even in this case, since the specific display is deleted at the subsequent specific timing, it is possible to prevent the specific display from being continuously displayed and giving the player a sense of distrust. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that easily attracts the interest of the player when installed in the game hall and easily gains the trust of the player.

Further, the grant amount display and the notification effect may be associated with each other. For example, when it is notified that the control is controlled to the advantageous state by the notification effect, the grant amount that can be obtained in the advantageous state for two times may be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to fuel the point that a large amount of grant can be obtained, and the interest is improved.

Further, as another example of a gaming machine capable of improving the interest, a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state, a small hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player (for example, a pachinko machine related to the feature unit 010AK). It is a game machine 1)
Hold storage means (for example, hold information storage area for effect control) that can store information related to variable display as hold information, and
When controlled to the advantageous state, a notification effect (for example, hold continuous notification) for notifying that the hold information corresponding to the control to the advantageous state is stored in the hold storage means can be executed. The effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of step 010AKS004 and step 010AKS007) and
By executing the notification effect, the specific display means capable of displaying the specific display (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 010AKS007) and
An erasing effect executing means (for example, step 010AKS024) capable of executing a specific display erasing effect (for example, erasing effect) for erasing the specific display at a predetermined timing (for example, timing TA, TB, or TC) of the variable display corresponding to the specific display. The effect control CPU 120) that executes the process of step 010AKS025 is provided.
If the specific display is not erased at the predetermined timing due to a predetermined event (for example, an error in the omission of the fluctuation pattern command or the deletion effect setting process) while the specific display is displayed, the specific display is not deleted at the predetermined timing. A gaming machine capable of executing a special control for erasing the specific display at a later specific timing (for example, timing TD) (for example, the processing of step 010AKS045 can be executed) can be mentioned. A form example of this gaming machine will be described below as another form example.

(Another form example)
(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 11, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S901). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S902). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S903). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S903; Yes), the initialization process (step S908) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S909). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S903; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S904). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S904, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S904; No), the initialization process (step S908) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S904; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal or not (step). S905). In step S905, for example, the parity bit and the checksum are used to determine whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S905; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S908) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S905; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S906) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S907). In accordance with this, the effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and the effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command that specifies the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S9010). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9011), and the interrupt is enabled (step S9012). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 12-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature portion 152F. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 152F, reference numerals and description will be omitted for the same configuration as the front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1, and different parts will be described.

In the game area where the driven game ball can flow down, the first path of the flow-down path through which the game ball flows down is mainly provided in the area on the left side of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front, and the game is played. Of the flow paths through which the sphere flows, a second path different from the first path is mainly provided in the area on the right side of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front.

Hitting a game ball into the left side area (left side game area) of the image display device 5 in order to allow the game ball to flow down the first path is called left-handed hitting. Hitting a game ball into the right side area (right side game area) of the image display device 5 in order to allow the game ball to flow down the second path is called right-handed hitting. Since the first route is a route in which the game ball can flow down by driving the game ball on the left side of the game area, it may be called a left-handed route. Further, the second route may be called a right-handed route because it is a route in which the game ball can flow down by driving the game ball on the right side of the game area.

The first route and the second route may be configured by different routes, or may be partially shared routes. The left game area and the right game area may be separated by, for example, the end face of the image display device 5 in the game area, the arrangement of the game nails, and the like.

When the game ball launched from the ball striking device and driven into the game area in response to the operation of the ball striking handle 30 is guided to the left game area, for example, is guided along an array of game nails. Therefore, it becomes impossible or difficult to guide to the right game area. Further, when the game ball is guided to the right game area, for example, by being guided along the arrangement of the game nails, it becomes impossible or difficult to guide the game ball to the left game area.

A winning ball device 6A having a first starting winning opening is provided as a structure through which a game ball hit into the left gaming area of the gaming area can enter. The winning ball device 6A is arranged below the image display device 5. The winning ball device 6A is provided with a first starting port switch 22A for detecting a game ball that has entered the first starting winning opening.

A passing gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, and a V-determined winning device 87 are provided as a structure through which a game ball hit into the right game area of the game area can enter. The variable winning ball device 6B has a second starting winning opening in which a game ball can be won. Further, as a switch for detecting the game balls that have entered each of them, a gate switch 21 is provided inside the passing gate 41, and a second starting opening switch 22B is provided inside the second starting winning opening. A V winning switch 87a, a V determination winning switch 15a, and a V determination discharging switch 15b are provided inside the above.

In the left game area, game nails are planted so that the game ball is guided to the first starting prize opening of the winning opening structure. Therefore, when aiming to allow the game ball to enter the first start winning opening, the player may hit the game ball to the left. Further, in the right game area, game nails are planted so that the game ball is guided to the second starting prize opening and the passing gate 41 of the winning opening structure. Therefore, when aiming to allow the game ball to enter the second start winning opening and the passing gate 41, the player may hit the game ball to the right.

The passage gate 41 is a gate structure through which a game ball can enter (pass). When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The normal design will be described later. In the left game area, game nails are planted so that the game ball is guided to the first starting prize opening of the winning opening structure. Therefore, when aiming to allow the game ball to enter the first start winning opening, the player may hit the game ball to the left. Further, in the right game area, game nails are planted so that the game ball is guided to the second starting prize opening and the passing gate 41 of the winning opening structure. Therefore, when aiming to allow the game ball to enter the second start winning opening and the passing gate 41, the player may hit the game ball to the right.

The V-determination winning device 87 is a device for determining the V-winning of a game ball, which is a condition for generating a large hit when a small hit occurs.

The V-determination winning device 87 is made of a transparent member, and it is possible to visually recognize how the game ball passes through the inside. The V-judgment winning device 87 is provided with a width at which a game ball can pass in the front-rear direction, and walls are provided on both sides (front side and back side) of a passage that is inclined from right to left and extends in the left-right direction. A portion is provided, and a taxiway through which the game ball is guided is formed along the passage. At the center of the guideway, when a small hit occurs, over a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds x 10 times opening period + 1 second closing period (interval period) x 9 times + end period 1 second) By repeating opening and closing, an operating port is formed as an opening in which a total of about 10 or more game balls can win a prize within a predetermined period of opening. The passage of the game ball in the V-judgment winning device 87 is provided with a plurality of protrusions as deceleration means for decelerating the guided game ball alternately on both sides of the wall portion, so that when hitting to the right. , A structure (hereinafter referred to as a deceleration structure) is formed in which the game ball slowly flows in the passage above the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87.

In the small hit game state, the V-judgment winning device 87 is used for a relatively long period of time until the entry of 10 game balls into the V-judgment winning device 87 is detected or until a predetermined period elapses. Open control is executed. In the V-judgment winning device 87, the portion of the taxiway where the operating port is not formed forms a fixed passage called a fixed portion 873. At a position where the operating port can be opened and closed, a movable portion 872 that can move forward and backward on the operating port is provided.

The movable portion 872 is driven by the solenoid 22, and can move forward and backward to open and close the operation port. When the operating port is closed due to the state of the movable portion 872, the game ball can pass through the upper surfaces of the movable portion 872 and the fixed portion 873 as a taxiway, and is guided from the right end to the left end on the taxiway and falls from the left end. To do. When the operating port is opened due to the operating state of the movable portion 872, the operating port opens in the taxiway, so that the game ball guided to the taxiway can fall from the operating port into the V-judgment winning device 87. Become.

Inside the V-judgment winning device 87 (operating port), the V-winning area 870 as a specific area is the center in the left-right direction at the bottom of the V-judgment winning device 87 as a winning area in which a game ball entering from the operating port can win. Further, a ramp is provided in the portion, and a ramp is provided to guide all the game balls that have entered from the operating port onto the V winning area 870 by a slanted path. The V winning area 870 has a V winning opening through which the game ball can enter, and the gaming ball entered from the V winning opening can be guided downward.

At the uppermost end of the winning opening (V winning opening) of the V winning area 870, a plate-shaped opening / closing member (not shown) that can switch the V winning area 870 to either an open state or a closed state is provided. There is. The opening / closing member is driven by the solenoid 24, and can move forward and backward to open / close the V winning opening. When the V winning opening is opened due to the state of the opening / closing member, the game ball guided on the V winning area 870 can fall into the V winning area 870. On the other hand, when the V winning opening is closed due to the state of the opening / closing member, the game ball guided on the V winning area 870 passes over the opening / closing member and opens in the vicinity of the downstream side of the V winning area 870. It is provided in a state where it can fall into a winning ball area (not shown) that can guide the game downward.

Specifically, the V winning area 870 of the V determination winning device 87 is basically in an open state, and one game ball is in a small hit game state in which the operating port of the V determination winning device 87 is opened. When the player enters the V winning area 870 and wins a prize, the game ball is detected by the V winning switch 87a provided in the V winning area 870. In the small hit game state, when one game ball is detected by the V winning switch 87a, the opening / closing member is controlled to the closed state, and the game ball subsequently guided onto the V winning area 870 is within the winning ball area. Will enter. The game ball that has entered the winning ball area is detected by the V determination winning switch 15a provided in the winning ball area. As a result, as for the game balls that have entered the V-determination winning device 87, one game ball is detected by the V-decision winning switch 87a, and the subsequent game balls are detected by the V-determining winning switch 15a.

When the total number of balls detected by the V-judgment winning switch 87a and the V-judgment winning switch 15a reaches 10, the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 opened in the small hit game state is closed and the game ball enters. It is considered impossible. The V winning area 870 and the winning ball area are configured to merge at the bottom, and the game ball that has entered the V determination winning device 87 through the merged discharge passage is a predetermined game board 2 inside. It is discharged to the discharge passage. A V-determination discharge switch 15b capable of detecting the discharged game balls is provided in the discharge passage, and all the game balls discharged by the switch are detected.

When a small hit occurs and the operating port of the V determination winning device 87 is opened, the game ball wins in the V winning area 870 and the game ball is detected by the V winning switch 87a during a predetermined valid period. , The condition for generating a big hit is satisfied, and the game is controlled to a big hit game state. Such a winning of a game ball in the V winning area 870 is called a V winning. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, as described above, during the period when a small hit occurs and the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 is opened, a total of about 10 gaming balls are required on average without requiring any special operation. The structural design and control design are designed so that the player can enter the V-judgment winning device 87, and when the gaming ball can enter the V-judgment winning device 87, the gaming ball is always (100%) V-winning area. The structure is designed to enter 870. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a small hit occurs, a right-handed promotion notification for instructing right-handed is executed so that the player can easily hit the game ball into the V determination winning device 87. To.

Therefore, when a small hit occurs, during the opening period of the operating opening of the V-judgment winning device 87, unless the player does not fire the game ball or the player hits the left side, hit the right side. For example, the (100%) game ball always enters the V winning area 870 and a big hit occurs.

In this embodiment, an example in which the V-determination winning device 87 is provided with a deceleration structure for a game ball is shown. However, without providing such a deceleration structure, an operating port capable of dropping the game ball is provided in a part of the taxiway of the game ball in the V determination winning device 87, and during the period of the small hit game state. In order to allow about 10 game balls to enter the V winning area 870, a configuration in which the operating port is opened 10 times may be used.

In the right game area, game nails are planted so that the game ball is guided to the variable winning ball device 6B and the V determination winning device 87. Therefore, when aiming to allow the game ball to enter the variable winning ball device 6B and the V determination winning device 87, the player may hit the game ball to the right.

It should be noted that the game ball struck in the left game area may enter either the variable winning ball device 6B or the V determination winning device 87, but from the viewpoint of game playability, the game ball may enter either of the variable winning ball device 6B and the V determination winning device 87. It is desirable that the possibility is extremely low compared to the possibility that the game balls struck in the right game area will enter them.

A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the game area. In the special variable winning ball device 7, a right-handed game ball is guided by a game nail planted in the right game area. Further, the special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that the game ball does not enter from the left game area due to the planted state of the game nail.

The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening whose front surface is covered with a rectangular door, and when a big hit occurs, the solenoid tilts the door forward with the bottom as an axis, and the large winning opening appears ( Open). Inside the special variable winning ball device 7, a count switch 23 for detecting the entered game ball is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a winning route by a game nail or other structure so that the game ball can be won in the large winning opening only when the game ball is driven into the right game area. It is restricted. It should be noted that regardless of whether the game ball is hit in either the left game area or the right game area, it may be possible to win a prize in the large winning opening.

The jackpot is when the jackpot symbol (big hit display result) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, and when the jackpot symbol (big hit display result) is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, respectively. Occurs in. When a big hit is decided by a lottery based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting winning opening, the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A. When a big hit is decided by a lottery based on the winning of the game ball in the second start winning opening, the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B.

The big hit also occurs when the game ball that entered when the operating port of the V determination winning device 87 is open due to the small hit gaming state enters the V winning area 870. Hereinafter, when the game ball enters the V winning area 870 and is detected by the V winning switch 87a, it is referred to as V winning. The small hit is a hit at which the operating port of the V determination winning device 87 is opened as a predetermined value addition, and a big hit can be generated on condition that the V winning is given. In the V-determination winning device 87, the gaming state in which the operating port is open is referred to as a "small hit gaming state". Then, in the small hit game state, the big hit generated based on the V prize of the game ball is called "big hit via small hit". On the other hand, the jackpot game state based on the display result of the variation display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is referred to as "big hit by special symbol".

The jackpot game state is a specific game state (advantageous state) that is advantageous to the player as a predetermined value addition, and the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly and continuously controlled to repeat the open state and the closed state a predetermined number of times. In the repetitive continuous control, the state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened (the large winning opening is opened) is called a round. Repeated continuous control is also called round control.

In the jackpot game state, after the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened, the end condition of the predetermined open state (a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed in the open state, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) has elapsed. It will be closed according to the establishment of the opening end condition) that the winning ball has been generated. Then, when the opening end condition is satisfied, the continuation right is generated, and the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is repeated until the number of times of opening in the jackpot game state reaches the predetermined upper limit of 15 rounds (final round).

In the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition (first execution condition) or the second start condition (second execution condition), which is the execution condition of the variation display, is satisfied (for example, the game ball After passing through (including winning) the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening as the starting winning area), the start condition of the variable display (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is displayed. It is started based on the establishment of a state in which the game is not executed and the jackpot game is not executed), and when the variable display time (variable time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. It should be noted that the passage of a game ball means that the game ball has passed through a pre-determined area such as a winning opening or a gate as a winning area, and a concept including that the game ball has entered (winned) in the winning opening. Is. Further, the derivation display of the display result means that the symbol (example of identification information) is finally stopped and displayed (confirmed display).

In addition, the variable display for which the start condition has not yet been satisfied even though the game ball has entered the start area such as the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening is still started within the predetermined upper limit number. The storage of information related to the variable display for which the conditions are not satisfied is called hold storage. The term "holding memory" is also used to indicate (specify) the information held on hold. Hold memory is also called start memory or start winning memory.

For the first special symbol, the variable display is executed based on the first hold memory as the hold memory based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening. For the second special symbol, the variable display is executed based on the second hold memory as the hold memory based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening. When a jackpot occurs in the state where such a first hold memory or a second hold memory exists, the hold memory that existed before the occurrence of the jackpot is maintained as it is, and is displayed in a variable manner after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Used for.

When the second start prize is generated in the second start prize opening, even if there is a hold memory of the first start prize, the variable display of the second special symbol based on the second start prize is preferentially executed. To. In this way, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol.

Above the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, there is a second hold consisting of four indicators that display the number of valid winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening, that is, the number of second hold storages. A display 25B is provided. The second hold indicator 25B increases the number of indicators that light up by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display device 4B is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one.

Above the second hold indicator 25B, a first hold indicator 25A composed of four indicators for displaying the number of valid winning balls entered in the first start winning opening, that is, the number of first hold storages is provided. .. The first hold indicator 25A increases the number of indicators that are lit each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display device 4A is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the player changes by firing a game ball so as to use "left-handed" aiming at the left game area and "right-handed" aiming at the right game area properly according to the game situation. The game state and the production state are controlled so that a rich game can be enjoyed. The flow of the game after the player starts the game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described below.

When the player is seated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and starts the game for the first time, the player first strikes the pachinko machine 1 so that the game ball wins the first starting winning opening. Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the display result is a big hit (big hit by the special symbol), the game is switched from left-handed to right-handed and aimed at the special variable winning ball device 7 to be released. .. After the jackpot game state is completed, a right-handed promotion notification is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 to urge the player to play the game by right-handed. Specifically, a display such as "Aim to the right" is performed on the screen of the image display device 5.

During the jackpot game state, a game is performed in which the special variable winning ball device 7 that has been opened is aimed by right-handed hitting. During the jackpot game state, a right-handed promotion notification is performed. After the end of the big hit game state, if the time is shortened, which will be described later, the game is continued by right-handed. After the jackpot game is completed, if the time saving state is reached, the time saving notification for notifying that the time saving state is started is performed on the screen of the image display device 5. In addition, right-handed promotion notification is also performed during the time saving state. If the time is not shortened after the jackpot game state ends, the right-handed promotion notification executed during the jackpot game state ends, and the game ball wins the first start winning opening by switching from right-handed to left-handed. Play the game as if. If the time is not shortened, a left-handed promotion notification (also referred to as a left-handed notification) is provided on the screen of the image display device 5 to urge the player to return to left-handedness and play the game. You may.

During the time saving state after the big hit game is completed, the game is performed aiming at the variable winning ball device 6B having the second starting winning opening by right-handed. If a game ball wins in the second start winning opening and the displayed result is a big hit (a big hit with a special symbol), the game is performed aiming at the special variable winning ball device 7 while hitting right. Further, if the game ball wins the second start winning opening and the display result is the small hit display result, the operating opening of the V determination winning device 87 is opened in the small hit game state, so that the V determination is made while hitting right. The game is performed aiming at the winning device 87. At the start of the small hit game state, the small hit start notification for notifying that the small hit game state is started is performed on the screen of the image display device 5. Further, when the small hit game state is controlled, a specific timing (depending on the game situation, the start timing of the small hit display executed before the operation port of the V determination winning device 87 is opened according to the small hit). , Or, at a predetermined timing before the small hit display is executed.), Right-handed promotion notification is also performed.

When the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 is open due to the small hit game state, the game ball falls from the operating port into the inside of the V-judgment winning device 87, enters the V-judgment winning area 870, and is detected. When a V prize occurs, a big hit via a small hit occurs. When a V-winning occurs, a V-winning notification is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the V-winning has occurred. Further, at the end of the small hit game state, a small hit end notification is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the small hit game state has ended. Then, after the end of the small hit, the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in the big hit game state, so that the player plays the game aiming at the special variable winning ball device 7 while hitting right.

Further, when a game is performed aiming at the V determination winning device 87 in the small hit game state, if the game ball does not enter the V winning area 870 and enters a non-specific area other than the V winning area 870, the big hit Does not occur. When the V prize does not occur during the small hit game state in this way, the V prize failure notification is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the V prize has failed. Further, at the end of the small hit game state, a small hit end notification is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the small hit game state has ended. Then, after the end of the small hit game state, when the time saving state continues, the player continues to play the game aiming at the variable winning ball device 6B while hitting right. When the time saving state ends, the game is switched from right-handed to left-handed so that the game ball wins in the first starting winning opening. At the end of the time-saving state, a time-saving end notification for notifying that the time-saving has ended is performed on the screen of the image display device 5, and a left-handed promotion notification for urging the player to return to left-handed to play the game.

FIG. 12-2 is a diagram showing a hit type table. In the hit type table, the jackpot occurrence condition, the control state after the jackpot (game state), the number of open times in the jackpot (number of rounds), and the open time of each round in the jackpot are shown for each hit type. In this embodiment, the big hit types are: symbol 15R time-saving big hit, symbol 4R time-saving big hit, via small hit 16 (15) R time-saving big hit, via small hit 9 (8) R time-saving big hit, and via small hit 5 (4). ) R time saving jackpot is provided. The number of times the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened is shown in parentheses of the big hit via the small hit.

The small hit occurs when the game ball wins the second starting winning opening provided in the variable winning ball device 6B and the display result of the second special symbol becomes the small hit symbol. Judgment as to whether or not to make the display result of the special symbol a small hit symbol is performed in advance by a random number lottery (small hit determination of the special symbol). When a small hit occurs, a small hit game state is set, and the operating port of the V determination winning device 87 is opened in an opening pattern in which the number of times of opening is 10 and the opening time is 0.1 seconds. The game control state (big hit probability, small hit probability, base, which will be described later) after the end of the small hit game state is the same as before the small hit. In the small hit, the prize ball is paid out to the game ball that has won the V winning area 870 in the V determination winning device 87 during the small hit game state. It is set that about 10 winning balls can be generated during the small hit game state, and about 30 winning balls can be paid out according to the winning balls.

When the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 is open, a game ball is won in the operating port, and the game ball enters the V-winning area 870 inside the V-judgment winning device 87 (V-winning), a big hit occurs. To do. A big hit via such a small hit is called a big hit via a small hit. The big hit via small hit includes 16 (15) R time saving big hit via small hit, 9 (8) R time short big hit via small hit, and 5 (4) R time short big hit via small hit. Is done. The small hit linked so as to be a 16 (15) R time saving big hit is called the first small hit. The small hit linked so as to be a 9 (8) R time saving big hit is called a second small hit. The small hit linked so as to be a 5 (4) R time saving big hit is called a third small hit.

On the other hand, a big hit that is directly generated by a variable display of a special symbol without going through a small hit is called a symbol big hit. The symbol jackpot includes a symbol 15R time-saving jackpot that is directly generated based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and a symbol 4R time-saving jackpot.

In this way, as a big hit, a symbol big hit that is directly generated based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and a small hit that is generated based on the variable display of the second special symbol are generated by V winning. Includes big hits via small hits. Each of the big hits via the symbol big hit and the big hit via the small hit is a big hit that is controlled to the time saving state after the end of the big hit game state, and is named as a time saving big hit. An advantageous state advantageous for the player in the present embodiment includes opening the special variable winning ball device 7.

The symbol 15R time-saving jackpot is a jackpot in which the jackpot is opened 15 times (15R). The symbol 4R time-saving jackpot is a jackpot in which the jackpot is opened four times (4R). For 16 (15) R time saving big hit via small hit, after the V judgment winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds x 10 times), the big winning opening is opened 15 times (15R) on condition of V winning. It is a big hit, and the winning device for 16 rounds is opened, but the number of times the big winning opening is opened is 15 times, and the player can open the big winning opening in the same way as the big hit with the design 15R time reduction. I feel it is a type. 9 (8) R time saving big hit via small hit is a big hit in which the big winning opening is opened 8 times (8R) on condition of V winning after the V judgment winning device 87 is opened (0.1 seconds x 10 times). Is. For 5 (4) R time saving big hit via small hit, after the V judgment winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds x 10 times), the big winning opening is opened 4 times (4R) on condition of V winning. It is a big hit, and the winning device for 5 rounds is opened, but the number of times the big winning opening is opened is 4 times, and the player has the same big hit as the symbol 4R time saving big hit regarding the opening of the big winning opening. I feel it is a type.

In the time saving state after the symbol 4R time saving big hit, the end condition that the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol is 1 and the end condition that the total number of times of variation display of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol are 5 times. Two end states are set. The number of times of the time-saving end condition that the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol is one considers that the game ball that has entered the V-judgment winning device 87 enters the V-winning area 870 at a rate of 100%. Is set. In the variable display of the second special symbol, small hits occur at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the end condition that the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol is one may generate a big hit via a small hit at a rate of about 1/7 when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. There is a certain number of times.

The number of times of the time-saving end condition that the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol is one is set for the following reasons. In the case of the symbol 4R time saving jackpot, basically, the time saving state (including the electric support state) is continued until the variation display of the second special symbol is completed once, but in order to display the variation of the second special symbol, It is necessary to hit the right side to allow the game ball to enter the passing gate 41 to open the variable winning ball device 6B, and in that state, to win the game ball to the variable winning ball device 6B, such a variable winning ball device. It takes time for the game ball to be won in 6B, and the first special symbol that has been held and stored may be displayed in a variable manner first.

Therefore, the end condition that the total number of variable display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 5 is a big hit immediately after the start of the time saving state and before the variable display start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied. 1 of the 2nd special symbol which is easy to be decided as a big hit which is advantageous for the player even if the variable display of the 1st special symbol by the hold memory based on the 1st start winning which can store up to 4 pieces before the game state is started. This is a condition for ensuring that the variable display of the times can be executed. By doing so, the variable display of the first special symbol by the hold memory based on the first start winning is started immediately after the start of the time saving state, so that it is easy to determine the jackpot advantageous to the player in the time saving state. It is possible to prevent the variable display of the second special symbol from being stopped.

After a big hit other than the symbol 4R time saving big hit, the end condition that the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol is 7 times and the end condition that the total number of times of variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 11 times. Two end states are set. The number of times of 7 times, which is the end condition of the time saving state, is set in consideration of the fact that the game ball that has entered the V determination winning device 87 enters the V winning area 870 at a rate of 100%. In the variable display of the second special symbol, small hits occur at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the end condition that the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol is 7 times may generate a jackpot via a small hit as compared with the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. Is the number of times that is significantly higher. As a result, the player can pay attention to the occurrence of the big hit via the small hit, and the player's expectation about the occurrence of the big hit via the small hit can be raised.

In addition, the end condition that the total number of variable display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 11 is a big hit immediately after the start of the time saving state and before the variable display start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied. 7 of the 2nd special symbol which is easy to be decided as a big hit which is advantageous for the player even if the variable display of the 1st special symbol by the hold memory based on the 1st start winning which can store up to 4 pieces before the game state is started. This is to ensure that the variable display of the number of fluctuations is feasible. By doing so, the variable display of the first special symbol by the hold memory based on the first start winning is started immediately after the start of the time saving state, so that it is easy to determine the jackpot advantageous to the player in the time saving state. It is possible to prevent the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol from decreasing.

In this embodiment, in the low base state, which is the normal state, the first starting winning opening is provided so that the winning can be won from the first path. Therefore, it is the second that the game ball flows down the first path. It is more advantageous for the player in terms of starting prize than the game ball flowing down the route. On the other hand, in an advantageous state such as a big hit game state, a special variable winning ball device 7 that is opened is provided so that a prize can be won from the second path. It is more advantageous for the player in terms of winning a big hit than the game ball flowing down. Further, in a specific state such as a small hit game state, the V-judgment winning device 87 that is opened is provided so that a prize can be won from the second path. Therefore, the one in which the game ball flows down the second path is the first path. It is more advantageous for the player in terms of generating a big hit than the game ball flowing down.

Not limited to such comparison of advantages, for example, another winning opening (for example, another variable winning opening (which may be for starting winning or non-starting winning) is the first route. And the second route, and in the low base state as a normal state, the first route is easier to win the variable winning opening than the second route, and the high base state, the big hit game state, and the small From another point of view, such that in other states such as the winning game state, the second path is easier to win the variable winning opening than the first path, in the normal state, the game medium uses the first path. A configuration may be adopted in which it is advantageous for the player to flow down, and in other gaming states, it is advantageous for the player to have the game medium flow down the second path.

FIG. 12-3 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. In FIG. 12-3, the type of random number, the update range, the use, and the addition condition are shown. Each random number is used as follows.

(1) Random R: A random counter for hit determination that determines whether or not to make a big hit and whether or not to make a small hit. Random 1 is updated by 1 at 10 MHz, added and updated from 0, added and updated up to its upper limit of 65535, and then added and updated again from 0. (2) Random 1: Type of big hit (type, symbol 15R time saving big hit, symbol 4R time saving big hit, via small hit 16 (15) R time saving big hit, via small hit 9 (8) via R time saving big hit, and via small hit 5 (4) Determine the R time-saving jackpot type) and the jackpot symbol (for determining the jackpot type, for determining the jackpot symbol). (3) Random 2: The type (type) of the fluctuation pattern is determined (for determining the fluctuation pattern type). (4) Random 3: Determine the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) (for determining the fluctuation pattern). (5) Random 4: Determine whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for determining a normal symbol hit). (6) Random 5: Determine the initial value of random 5 (for determining the initial value of random 5).

In this embodiment, as the big hits in the specific game state, the symbol 15R time saving big hit, the symbol 4R time saving big hit, the small hit via 16 (15) R time saving big hit, the small hit via 9 (8) R time saving big hit, and the small hit It includes multiple types of via 5 (4) R time saving jackpot. Therefore, when a big hit is decided or a small hit is decided based on the value of the hit judgment random number (random R), it is based on the value of the big hit type judgment random number (random 1). Therefore, the type of jackpot is determined to be one of these jackpot types. However, in the case of a big hit via a small hit, the determined big hit is invalid unless a V prize is generated. Further, when the jackpot type is determined, the jackpot symbol is also determined based on the value of the jackpot type determination random number (random 1) at the same time. Therefore, random number 1 is also a random number for determining a jackpot symbol. Further, when the type of small hit is determined, the small hit symbol is determined at the same time. Therefore, random number 1 is also a random number for determining a small hit symbol.

Further, as for the fluctuation pattern, first, the fluctuation pattern type is determined using the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern type (random 2), and any of the variation patterns included in the determined fluctuation pattern type using the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (random 3). Determine the fluctuation pattern. As such, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by a two-step lottery process. The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. One or more fluctuation patterns belong to the fluctuation pattern type.

In this embodiment, the variation pattern is classified into a normal variation pattern type, which is a variation pattern type without reach, and a reach variation pattern type, which is a variation pattern type with reach.

FIG. 12-4 is an explanatory diagram showing a first special figure hit determination table, a second special figure hit determination table, and various jackpot type determination tables. These tables are stored in ROM 101.

FIG. 12-4 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a first special figure hit determination table. The first special symbol hit determination table is a data table for determining a jackpot for the first special symbol, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with a random R is set. The "probability" shown in FIG. 12-4 (A) indicates the probability (ratio) of becoming a big hit.

The jackpot probability of the first special symbol differs depending on the set value. Setting 1 is 1/199, setting 2 is 1/190, setting 3 is 1/180, setting 4 is 1/170, setting 5 is 1/160, and setting 6 is 1/150. Therefore, the jackpot probability is high in the order of setting 1 <setting 2 <setting 3 <setting 4 <setting 5 <setting 6.

FIG. 12-4 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a second special figure hit determination table. The second special figure hit judgment table is a data table for making a big hit judgment and a small hit judgment for the second special symbol, and a big hit judgment value to be compared with a random R and a small hit judgment value are set. It is a table that is. The upper part in FIG. 12-4 (B) is the big hit determination table part, and the lower part in FIG. 12-4 (B) is the small hit determination table part. The "probability" shown in the upper part of FIG. 12-4 (B) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit, and the "probability" shown in the lower part of FIG. 12-4 (B) indicates the probability (ratio) of a small hit. ..

The jackpot probability of the second special symbol differs depending on the set value. Setting 1 is 1/199, setting 2 is 1/190, setting 3 is 1/180, setting 4 is 1/170, setting 5 is 1/160, and setting 6 is 1/150. Therefore, the jackpot probability is high in the order of setting 1 <setting 2 <setting 3 <setting 4 <setting 5 <setting 6. On the other hand, the small hit probability of the second special symbol is set to 1 / 7.35 regardless of the set value. A small hit may be provided on the first special symbol. In such a case, it is desirable that the first special symbol has a lower probability of winning a small hit than the second special symbol. For example, the small hit probability by the first special symbol may be set to 1/100.

When the CPU 103 detects a start prize (first start prize) to the first start prize opening or a start prize (second start prize) to the second start prize opening, the random number circuit 124 is at a predetermined timing. The count value (random R) of is extracted. For the first start winning, the extracted value is compared with the jackpot judgment value set in the first special figure hit judgment table, and if the extracted value matches any of the jackpot judgment values, the first special symbol is hit. To decide. For the second start winning, the extracted value is compared with the jackpot judgment value set in the second special figure hit judgment table, and if the extracted value matches any of the jackpot judgment values, the second special symbol is hit as a jackpot. To decide. Then, when the extracted value does not match any of the big hit judgment values, the extracted value is compared with the small hit judgment value set in the second special figure hit judgment table, and the extracted value is the one of the small hit judgment values. If they match, it is decided to make a small hit with respect to the second special symbol. Deciding to make a small hit also means making a tentative decision to make a big hit via a small hit (it is described as a tentative decision because it is not controlled by a big hit unless a V prize occurs during the small hit). ..

It should be noted that deciding whether or not to make a big hit means deciding whether or not to shift to the big hit game state, but the stop symbol by the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changed to the big hit symbol. It also means deciding whether or not to do it. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a small hit means deciding whether or not to shift to the small hit game state, but whether to make the stop symbol by the variable display of the second special symbol a small hit symbol It also means deciding whether or not.

12-4 (C), (D), and (E) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. 12-4 (C) is a first special symbol jackpot type determination table used for determining the jackpot type of the symbol jackpot when it is determined to be a jackpot by the first special symbol. FIG. 12-4 (D) is a second special symbol jackpot type determination table used for determining the jackpot type of the symbol jackpot when it is determined to be a jackpot by the second special symbol.

In the first special figure big hit type judgment table of FIG. 12-4 (C), the numerical values to be compared with the random 2 values for the big hit type judgment are "symbol 15R time saving big hit" and "symbol 4R time saving big hit". The jackpot judgment value corresponding to each of the above is set. In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 12-4 (D), a jackpot determination value corresponding to "symbol 15R time saving jackpot" is set, which is a numerical value to be compared with the value of random 1.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-4 (C) and 12-4 (D), the jackpot type determination value is also used as a determination value (big hit symbol determination value) for determining the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Be done. For example, the determination value corresponding to "8R time reduction jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to "3" of the jackpot symbol. The judgment value corresponding to "15R time saving big hit" is also set as the judgment value corresponding to "7" of the big hit symbol.

Using such various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value in which the random 1 value matches as the jackpot type, and the random 1 value matches as the jackpot symbol. Determine the jackpot design you made. As a result, the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

In the big hit type judgment table via small hit in FIG. 12-4 (E), the numerical values to be compared with the random 2 value for big hit type judgment are "via small hit 16 (15) R time saving big hit" and " A big hit determination value corresponding to each of "9 (8) R time saving big hit via small hit" and "5 (4) R time saving big hit via small hit" is set. However, the big hit types determined in the big hit type determination table via small hits are the first small hit (which is 16 (15) R time saving big hit) and the second small hit (which is 9 (8) R time saving big hit). , It is a provisional big hit type associated with each of the third small hits (5 (4) R time saving big hits), and is invalid unless a V prize is generated in the small hit game state.

12-5 and 12-6 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 100. In FIGS. 12-5 and 12-6, the relationship between specific command data for the effect control command, the name of the command, and the specified content of the command is shown. In the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIGS. 12-5 and 12-6, various effect control commands are transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 according to the game control state.

The main commands in FIGS. 12-5 and 12-6 will be described. The command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) that specifies a variation pattern that is variablely displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variation display of the special symbol (corresponding to the variation pattern XX, respectively). When a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of fluctuation patterns, there is a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to each of the fluctuation patterns specified by the number. "(H)" indicates that it is a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for designating the fluctuation start. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the command 80XX (H), it controls the effect display device to start the effect corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol.

The commands 8C01 (H) to 8C06 (H) are display result designation commands that indicate the off display result, the big hit type, the big hit display result for each small hit type, and the display result including the small hit display result.

The command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating that the variation display of the first special symbol is started. The command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating that the variation display of the second special symbol is started. The command 8F00 (H) is a symbol confirmation designation command for designating the end of the variation of the first and second special symbols.

The commands A001 to A005 (H) are hit start designation commands for designating the start of the jackpot gaming state for each type of jackpot.

The command A1XX (H) is a designated command indicating that the large winning opening is open for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is a command designated after opening the large winning opening, which indicates after opening (closing) the large winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

The commands A301 to A305 (H) are hit end designation commands for designating the end of the jackpot gaming state for each type of jackpot.

The command A401 (H) is a first start prize designation command for designating that there was a first start prize. The command A402 (H) is a second start prize designation command for designating that there was a second start prize.

The command B000 (H) is a normal state specification command that specifies that the game state is the normal state (low base state). The command B001 (H) is a first time saving state designation command for designating that the gaming state is the first time saving state (high base state). The command B002 (H) is a second time saving state designation command for designating that the gaming state is the second time saving state (high base state).

The command C0XX (H) is a first hold storage number designation command for designating the first hold storage number. "XX" in the command C0XX (H) indicates the first reserved storage number. The command C1XX (H) is a second hold storage number designation command for designating the second hold storage number. "XX" in the command C0XX (H) indicates the second reserved storage number.

In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a hold storage number designation command for specifying the hold storage number after the subtraction when subtracting the hold storage number, but the present invention is not limited to this. For each of the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number, a hold storage number subtraction specification command for specifying that the hold storage number is subtracted by 1 may be used.

The command C2XX (H) and the command C3XX (H) display the contents of the winning judgment results such as the big hit judgment, the big hit type judgment, and the variable pattern type judgment at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. This is an effect control command to be shown. Of these, the command C2XX (H) is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not the winning result is a big hit, whether or not the small hit is made, and the judgment result of the type of the big hit. Further, the command C3XX (H) is a variation type command indicating a determination result (determination result of the variation pattern type) of which determination value range the value of the random number for determination of the variation pattern type falls within the determination result at the time of winning. Is.

Command C401 (H) is a command that specifies to start the first small hit. Command C402 (H) is a command that specifies to start the second small hit. Command C403 (H) is a command that specifies to start the third small hit. Command C501 (H) is a command that specifies to start the first small hit. Command C502 (H) is a command that specifies to start the second small hit. Command C503 (H) is a command that specifies to start the third small hit. The command C601 (H) is a V-winning designation command for designating that there was a V-winning. The command C602 (H) is a V winning ball detection designation command for designating that a winning ball (including both a V winning ball and a winning ball other than the V winning ball) to the V determination winning device 87 has been detected.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the RAM 102 is provided with a first hold storage buffer for storing the hold storage information of the first special symbol. In the first hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first hold storage number is secured. In the first hold storage buffer, a random number for determining a jackpot (random R), which is a hardware random number, a random number for determining a jackpot type (random 1), which is a software random number, a random number for determining a variable pattern type (random 2), and , Random number for determining fluctuation pattern (random number 3) is stored.

Regarding the second special symbol, the RAM 102 is provided with a second reserved storage buffer for storing the reserved storage information of the second special symbol. In the second hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the second hold storage number is secured. In the second hold storage buffer, a random number for determining a jackpot (random R), which is a hardware random number, a random number for determining a jackpot type (random 1), which is a software random number, a random number for determining a variable pattern type (random 2), and , Random number for determining fluctuation pattern (random number 3) is stored.

Based on the winning of the first start winning opening, the CPU 103 extracts a random number value from each of the random number circuit 124 and the random counter for generating the software random number, and stores them in the storage area in the first hold storage buffer. Execute the process to (store). Specifically, these random values are extracted and stored (stored) in the first hold storage buffer based on the winning of the first starting winning opening. Further, based on the winning of the second start winning opening, the CPU 103 extracts a random number value from each of the random number circuit 124 and the random counter for generating the software random number, and stores them in the storage area in the second hold storage buffer. Executes the process of saving (storing) in. Specifically, these random values are extracted and stored (stored) in the second hold storage buffer based on the winning of the second starting winning opening.

The storage of information about the start winning prize in the hold storage buffer in this way may be indicated as "hold storage". The variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) and the variation pattern determination random number (random 3) are not extracted at the start winning prize and stored in advance in the hold storage buffer, but at the start of variation of the special symbol. It may be extracted.

FIG. 12-7 is a flowchart showing a start port switch passing process executed as a part of the process of S101. In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the first start port switch 22A is in the ON state (S1211). If the first start port switch 22A is not in the ON state, the process proceeds to S1221. When the first start port switch 22A is in the ON state, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first hold storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the first hold storage for counting the first hold storage number). Whether or not the value of the number counter is 4) is confirmed (S1212). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process proceeds to S1221.

If the first hold storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 103 increments the value of the first hold storage number counter by 1 (S1213). Next, the CPU 103 extracts values from the random number circuit 124 and the counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in the storage area in the first hold storage buffer (S1214). In the process of S1214, a random number for determining a jackpot (random R), a random number for determining a jackpot type (random 1), a random number for determining a variation pattern type (random 2), and a random number for determining a variation pattern (random 3) are extracted. Stored in the storage area.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a winning effect process for determining in advance the variation display result and the variation pattern type when the variation based on the detected start winning of the first special symbol is subsequently executed (S1215).

In this embodiment, a start winning is generated in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, various data obtained at the time of the starting winning is stored as hold storage information, and then the start condition of the variable display is set. When it is established, at the timing of starting the variable display, the variable display result is obtained for the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) for which the variable display is started based on the reserved storage information in the special symbol normal processing (S110). Is determined as a jackpot display result, and the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot determination value set corresponding to the various random number values described above and the jackpot type determination value. Then, the determination of the variation pattern (including the determination of the variation pattern type) in the variation pattern setting process (S111) is changed to the variation pattern type determination value and the variation pattern determination value set corresponding to the various random numbers described above. Do based on.

On the other hand, apart from such a decision, the timing before the variable display based on the start winning to the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening is started, specifically, the game ball is the first starting winning opening. Alternatively, at the timing when the start winning is won in the second start winning opening (the timing when the hold storage information is stored), the hold storage information storing various data obtained at the time of the start winning is pre-read, and based on the pre-read hold storage information. The big hit is determined in advance whether or not it will be a big hit, whether or not it will be a small hit, the type of big hit, and the type of fluctuation pattern, which are set in response to the various random numbers described above. The prize-winning effect processing for pre-reading determination is executed based on the determination value, the jackpot type determination value, and the fluctuation pattern type determination value. By doing so, the effect control CPU 120 predicts the variation display result in advance before the variation display of the effect symbol is executed, and based on various determination results at the time of starting winning, the variation display of the effect symbol is performed. It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect such as a look-ahead notice that announces that a big hit will occur (possibility of a big hit).

Then, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the symbol designation command to the effect control CPU 120 based on the determination result of the winning effect process (S1216), and also controls to transmit the variation type command to the effect control CPU 120 (S1216). S1217). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first start winning designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (S1218), sets the value of the first hold storage number counter in the EXT data, and issues the first hold storage number designation command. Control to transmit to the effect control CPU 120 (S1219).

By executing the processes of S126 and S1217, in this embodiment, regardless of the gaming state (gaming state such as high probability state, low probability state, high base state, low base state, jackpot gaming state, etc.), the first Every time a start prize is given to the start prize opening, both a symbol designation command and a variation type command are always transmitted to the effect control CPU 120.

Further, in this embodiment, when the process of S1216 to S1219 is executed and a start prize is generated in the first start prize opening, a symbol designation command, a variation type command, a first start prize designation command, and the first start prize designation command A set of four commands of the first hold storage number designation command is collectively transmitted within one timer interrupt.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second start port switch 22B is in the ON state (S1221). If the second start port switch 22B is not in the ON state, the process ends as it is. When the second start port switch 22B is in the ON state, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second hold storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second hold storage for counting the second hold storage number). Whether or not the value of the number counter is 4) is confirmed (S1222). If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit, the process ends as it is.

If the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 103 increments the value of the second reserved storage number counter by 1 (S1223). Next, the CPU 103 extracts values from the random number circuit 124 and the counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in the storage area in the second hold storage buffer (S1224). In the process of S1224, a random number for determining a jackpot (random R), a random number for determining a jackpot type (random 1), a random number for determining a variation pattern type (random 2), and a random number for determining a variation pattern (random 3) are extracted. Stored in the storage area.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a winning effect processing similar to the winning effect processing as described in S1215 for the detected start winning of the second special symbol (S1225). Then, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the symbol designation command to the effect control CPU 120 based on the determination result of the winning effect process (S1226), and also controls to transmit the variation type command to the effect control CPU 120 (S1227). ). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the second start winning designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (S1228), sets the value of the second hold storage number counter in the EXT data, and issues the second hold storage number designation command. Control to transmit to the effect control CPU 120 (S1229).

By executing the processes of S1226 and S1227, in this embodiment, regardless of the gaming state (gaming state such as high probability state, low probability state, high base state, low base state, jackpot gaming state, etc.), the second Every time a start prize is given to the start prize opening, both a symbol designation command and a variation type command are always transmitted to the effect control CPU 120.

Further, in this embodiment, when the process of S1226 to S1229 is executed and a start prize is generated in the second start prize opening, a symbol designation command, a variation type command, a second start prize designation command, and the second start prize designation command A set of four commands of the second hold storage number designation command is collectively transmitted within one timer interrupt.

FIG. 12-8 is a flowchart showing a special symbol normal process (S110) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not there is hold storage data in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer (S51). If there is no hold storage data in either the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer, the process ends.

If there is no hold storage data in the hold storage buffer in S51, the process for transmitting the customer waiting demo designation command (S80) is performed, and then the process ends. On the other hand, when there is hold storage data in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer in S51, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not there is hold storage data in the second hold storage buffer (S52). If there is hold storage data in the second hold storage buffer, the special symbol pointer (flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol) The data indicating "second" is set (S54). On the other hand, if there is no hold storage data in the second hold storage buffer, the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer (S53).

In this embodiment, hereinafter, the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is set according to whether the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer or the data indicating "second" is set. And the variation display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B are executed by using a common processing routine. When the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed based on the reserved storage data stored in the first reserved storage buffer. Be told. On the other hand, when the data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is based on the reserved storage data stored in the second reserved storage buffer. Is done.

Under the control of S52 to S54, if even one data of the second hold storage exists in the second hold storage buffer, the variable display of the second special symbol display device 4B based on the data of the second hold storage can be displayed. It is executed in preference to the variable display of the first special symbol display device 4A based on the data of the first hold storage.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storages = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102 and stores it in the reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102 (S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 has each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage buffer. Is read and stored in the random number buffer of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage buffer. It is stored in the random number buffer of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the hold storage counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first hold storage counter and sets each storage area in the first hold storage buffer. Shift the content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second reserved storage counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of the storage area in the second reserved storage buffer are erased.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 is placed in the storage area corresponding to the first hold storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first hold storage buffer of the RAM 102. Each stored random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102. Each random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number is extracted always matches the order in which the first reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, and 4. It has become like. Further, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each second reserved storage number is extracted always matches the order of the second reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, and 4. It has become like.

Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the hold storage number designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control CPU 120 based on the value of the hold storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer after subtraction (S59). ). In this case, when a value indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first hold storage number designation command. Further, when a value indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the second hold storage number designation command.

In the special symbol normal processing, first, the data indicating "first" indicating that the processing is executed for the first start winning opening, that is, the "first" indicating that the processing is executed for the first special symbol. Or the data indicating "second" indicating that the processing is executed for the second start winning opening, that is, the data indicating "second" indicating that the processing is executed for the second special symbol. , Set to a special symbol pointer. Then, in the subsequent processing in the special symbol process processing, the processing according to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make it common between the case where the first special symbol is targeted and the case where the second special symbol is targeted.

Next, the CPU 103 reads a random number R (random number for jackpot determination) from the random number buffer and executes the jackpot determination module (S61). In this case, the CPU 103 reads the jackpot determination random number extracted in S1214 of the start port switch passage process and S1224 of the start port switch pass process and stored in the hold storage buffer or the random number buffer, and performs the jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value or small hit determination value with a random number for jackpot determination, and if they match, executes a process of determining a jackpot or a small hit. That is, it is a program that executes a big hit determination process and a small hit determination process.

In the jackpot determination process, if the first special symbol matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 12-4 (A), the second special symbol is any of the jackpots shown in FIG. 12-4 (B). If it matches the judgment value, it is decided to make a big hit with respect to the special symbol. If it is decided to make a big hit (Y in S61), the process proceeds to S71. Determining whether or not to make a big hit means deciding whether or not to shift to the big hit game state, but it also means deciding whether or not to make the stop symbol on the special symbol display a big hit symbol. ..

If it is decided to make a big hit in S61 (Y in S61), a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit is set (S71).

Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol pointer indicates "first" (S72). When the special symbol pointer is "first", the first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 12-4 (C) is selected (S73), and the process proceeds to S75. On the other hand, when the special symbol pointer does not indicate "first" (when "second" is indicated), the second special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 12-4 (D) is selected (S74). , Proceed to S75.

In S75, using the jackpot type determination table selected in S73 or S74, the jackpot type corresponding to the value corresponding to the value of the random number (random 1) for determining the jackpot type stored in the random number buffer area is set as the jackpot type. The decision is made (S75), and the process proceeds to S81.

If the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match any of the jackpot determination values in S61 (N in S61), the data set in the special symbol pointer is the data indicating "second". By confirming whether or not there is, it is confirmed whether or not the jackpot determination target is the variable display of the second special symbol (S76). If the data set in the special symbol pointer in S76 is not the data indicating "second" (variable display of the first special symbol), the process proceeds to S82, which will be described later. On the other hand, when the data set in the special symbol pointer in S76 is the data indicating "second" (variable display of the second special symbol), the second special symbol in FIG. 12-4 (B) is hit. The small hit determination process is performed by determining whether or not the value of the large hit determination random number (random R) matches any small hit determination value using the determination table (S77). That is, when the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random R) matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIG. 12-4 (B) (Y in S77), it is determined that the second special symbol is a small hit. To do. Then, when it is decided to make a small hit (S77Y), a small hit flag indicating that it is a small hit is set (S78).

After setting the small hit flag, select the large hit type determination table via small hit in FIG. 12-4 (E) (S79), and the value of the random number (random 1) for determining the large hit type stored in the random number buffer area. The jackpot type corresponding to the value corresponding to is determined as the jackpot type via the small hit (S80). Then, it shifts to S81. On the other hand, if the value of the small hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the small hit determination values in S77 (N in S77), the process proceeds to S82, which will be described later.

In S81, the data indicating the jackpot type determined in S75 or S80 is stored in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (S81), and the process proceeds to S82. For example, when the jackpot type is "symbol 15R time saving jackpot", "01" is set in the jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type, and when the jackpot type is "symbol 4R time saving jackpot", the data indicating the jackpot type is set. "02" is set in the jackpot type buffer. On the other hand, when the big hit type is "16 (15) R time saving big hit via small hit", "03" is set in the provisional big hit type buffer different from the big hit type buffer as the data indicating the big hit type. When the jackpot type is via small hit 9 (8) R time saving jackpot, "04" is set in the provisional jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type. When the jackpot type is via small hit 5 (4) R time reduction jackpot, "05" is set in the provisional jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type. Of these, the data indicating 16 (15) R time saving big hit via small hit, 9 (8) R time saving big hit via small hit, and 5 (4) R time saving big hit via small hit are V prizes in the small hit gaming state. If there is no big hit, there is data that becomes invalid and is temporarily set.

In S82, a stop symbol of a special symbol is set (S78). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, "-", which is an outlier symbol, is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the small hit flag is set, any one of "1", "5", and "9", which is the small hit symbol selected and determined in S80 according to the small hit type, is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. To do. When the jackpot flag is set, either "3" or "7", which is the jackpot symbol selected and determined in S75 according to the jackpot type, is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process (S111) (S79).

FIG. 12-9 is a flowchart showing the small hit opening pre-processing (S118). In the small hit opening preprocessing, the CPU 103 controls the solenoid 22 to operate the movable portion 872 in the open state based on the small hit opening mode, and starts the opening operation of the operating port of the V determination winning device 87 ( S411). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a small hit start designation command indicating that the small hit game state is started to the effect control CPU 120 (S412). Next, the CPU 103 sets a V-determined winning number counter as a counting means in order to use the number of winnings in the V winning area 870 in the open state of the small hit as the end condition of the open state (S413). Specifically, in S413, the counter value of the V-judgment winning number counter is set to "10", and the setting for down-counting the V-winning number is set. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit opening processing (S119) (S414).

FIG. 12-10 is a flowchart showing a small hit opening process (S119) in the special symbol process process. In the small hit opening processing, the CPU 103 updates the small hit opening control timer by -1 subtraction (S430). Next, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter that counts the number of V winnings in S435, which will be described later, is "0" (S431). The V-judgment winning number counter is set to "10" according to S413 in FIG. 12-9, and when 10 V winning balls are counted, the counting value becomes "0". When the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter is "0" in S430, the process proceeds to S441. On the other hand, when the count value of the V determination winning number counter is not "0" in S430, it is confirmed whether or not the small hit opening control timer has timed out (timer value = 0) (S432).

When the small hit release control timer has timed out in S432, the process proceeds to S441. On the other hand, when the small hit release control timer has not timed out in S432, the movable portion 872 is opened by controlling the solenoid 22 according to the time value of the small hit release control timer based on the small hit release mode. The operation is performed to open and close the operation port of the V determination winning device 87 (S433).

Next, in order to determine whether or not the V winning generated by the game ball entering from the V winning opening into the V winning area 870 which is open inside the V judgment winning device 87 is detected, the V winning is won. It is determined whether or not the switch 87a is in the ON state (S434). When it is in the ON state in S434, it is when the V prize is detected, and the V prize flag set when the V prize is detected is set (S435). Then, a process for transmitting the V winning ball detection designation command is performed (S436). As a result, the effect control CPU 120 can recognize that the V winning ball has been detected, and can recognize the number of V winning balls. Next, the opening / closing member is operated by driving the solenoid to change the V winning opening of the V winning region 870 from the open state to the closed state (S437), and the process proceeds to S439. As a result, when the first game ball that has entered the V-judgment winning device 87 wins a V, the V-winning opening of the V-winning area 870 is closed, and then the game that has entered the V-judgment winning device 87. All the balls are guided to the winning ball region and detected by the V determination winning switch 15a.

On the other hand, when it is not in the ON state in S434, it means that the V winning is not detected, and it is determined whether or not the V determination winning switch 15a is in the ON state (S438). When it is in the ON state in S438, the process proceeds to S439, and when it is not in the ON state in S438, the process ends.

In S439, the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter set to "10" by S413 in FIG. 12-9 is down-counted to "-1" (S439), and the V-judgment winning ball detection designation command is transmitted. (S440). As a result, the effect control CPU 120 can recognize that the V winning ball that has entered the determination winning device 87 is detected after the V winning ball is detected, and the game that has entered the determination winning device 87. It becomes possible to recognize the number of spheres.

When the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter is "0" in S431, it means that the opening end condition of the small hit is satisfied because the number of V winnings per small hit reaches the upper limit value. When the small hit release control timer times out in S432, it means that the small hit release end condition is satisfied because the small hit release control is completed. At these times, the CPU 103 controls the solenoid 22 to operate the movable portion 872 in the closed state, and closes the operating port of the V determination winning device 87 (S441). When the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter becomes "0", even if the V-judgment winning device 87 is being opened according to the opening mode of the small hit, the counting value of the V-judgment winning number counter is increased. The V-judgment winning device 87 is forcibly closed. When the small hit release control timer times out, the V determination winning device 87 is closed according to the end of the small hit release control in the small hit opening mode.

Next, the data corresponding to the specific period, which is the V-winning valid period after the V-judgment winning device 87 is closed, is set in the V-winning valid period timer (S442), and the value of the special symbol process flag is set to the small hit end process (small hit end processing). The value corresponding to S120) is updated (S443), and the process ends. As a result, the time counting of the specific period, which is the valid period of the V prize after the V determination prize device 87 is closed, is started. Since the specific period, which is the valid period of the V prize, is set in this way, even if the game ball passes through the V prize area later than the time when the game ball normally passes in some time signature, the game ball Can be detected. Further, since a specific period is set, even if there is a person who illegally tries to win a prize in the V winning area, only that period is detected, so that fraud can be prevented.

FIG. 12-11 is a flowchart showing a small hit end process (S120) in the special symbol process process. In the small hit post-processing, the CPU 103 updates the V winning validity period timer by -1 subtraction (S441), and confirms whether or not the V winning validity period timer has timed out (timer value = 0) (S442).

When the V winning validity period timer has not timed out in S442, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag set in S434 or S445 is set when the V winning is already detected (S443). If the V winning flag is set, the process ends. On the other hand, if the V winning flag is not set, the V winning switch 87a is used to determine whether or not the V winning generated by the game ball entering the V winning area 870 during the V winning valid period is detected. Determines whether or not is in the ON state (S444). If it is not in the ON state in S444, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is turned on in S444, it means that the V prize is detected during the V prize valid period, and the V prize flag indicating that the V prize is detected is set (S445). Then, a process for transmitting the V prize designation command is performed (S446), and the process is terminated. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 can recognize that the V prize has occurred.

When the V winning validity period timer has timed out in S442, a process for transmitting a small hit end designation command is performed (S447). As a result, the effect control CPU 120 can recognize that the small hit has been completed. Next, by changing the state of the solenoid 22, control is performed to open the opening / closing member to return the V winning region 870 (V winning opening) to the open state (S447A). Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the V winning flag is set (S448). If the V winning flag is set in S448, it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit, and the jackpot flag is set (S449).

As described above, in the small hit game state, if the player hits the right according to the right-handed promotion notification described later, the game ball can enter the V-judgment winning device 87 with a probability of approximately 100%, and the V-judgment winning is won. A game ball that has entered the device 87 always wins a V in the V winning area 870, and the V winning flag is set with a probability of approximately 100% (S435 in FIG. 12-10). The jackpot flag is set and the jackpot game state is controlled.

Next, the CPU 103 converts the data indicating the jackpot type via the jackpot stored in the jackpot temporary type buffer in S81 into the jackpot type buffer according to the fact that it is determined that the data will be a regular jackpot due to the occurrence of the V prize. Formally memorize (S450). Then, the time saving flag set at that time is once reset (S451).

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start 3 designation command, a jackpot start 4 designation command, or a jackpot start 5 designation command according to the jackpot type corresponding to the data stored in S450 (S452). As a result, the effect control CPU 120 can recognize that the jackpot game state starts. Next, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (time for notifying the occurrence of the jackpot by, for example, the image display device 5) is set in the jackpot control timer (S453).

Further, referring to the jackpot opening pattern data stored in the ROM 101, the opening count (for example, 15 times, 8 times, or 4 times), the opening time (for example, 29 seconds), and the interval are set according to the jackpot type. Opening pattern data indicating an opening mode such as time (large winning opening closing time between rounds) is set in a predetermined storage area formed in the RAM 102 (S454). Among such data, the data of the number of times of opening is set in the number of times of opening counter for counting the number of times of opening. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (S114) (S455), and the processing is terminated. As a result, when a V prize occurs in the small hit game state, the game shifts to the big hit game state.

If the V winning flag is not set in S448, the big hit game state does not occur. Therefore, in S81, the data indicating the big hit type via the small hit stored in the big hit temporary type buffer is deleted (S456), and the special symbol process flag is set. The value is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (S110) (S457), and the processing ends. As a result, when the V prize does not occur in the small hit game state, the state does not shift to the big hit game state.

FIG. 12-12 is a display screen view showing an example of the effect of the notification effect. As shown in FIG. 12-12 (a), the notification effect for notifying that the hold information regarding the hit (big hit or small hit) in the hold storage buffer is stored during the ending period during the big hit game is executed. As a suggestion effect suggesting, the suggestion image 152F001 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. The suggestion image 152F001 displayed as a suggestion effect is a V-shaped effect image suggesting that the notification effect of the hold sequence by displaying "V" is subsequently executed.

The notification effect executed after the suggestion effect includes a notification effect according to the first aspect and a notification effect according to the second aspect. The notification effect according to the first aspect is an effect in which a small white "V" is displayed. Further, the notification effect according to the second aspect is an effect in which a large red "V" is displayed. In addition, the number of hits in the hold storage buffer is indicated by the number after "V". For example, "Vx1" indicates that there is one or more hits in the hold storage buffer, "Vx2" indicates that there are two or more hits in the hold storage buffer, and "Vx3" indicates that there are two or more hits. It indicates that there are three or more hits in the hold storage buffer, and "V × 4" indicates that there are four hits in the hold storage buffer. The number after the "V" may indicate that there are more hits in the hold storage buffer than are displayed. For example, in "Vx1", it may be displayed even when the number of hits is 2 to 3 instead of 1.

If the notification effect is not executed from the state of FIG. 12-12 (a), the ending image is played as shown in FIG. 12-12 (b). On the other hand, FIG. 12-12 (c) shows a case where the notification effect according to the first aspect is executed from the state of FIG. 12-12 (a). As shown in FIG. 12-12 (c), as the notification effect according to the first aspect, the first aspect image 152F002 with a small white “V” is displayed. In FIG. 12-12 (c), since it is “V × 1”, it is shown that there is one or more hits in the hold storage buffer.

FIG. 12-12 (d) shows a case where the notification effect according to the second aspect is executed from the state of FIG. 12-12 (a). As shown in FIG. 12-12 (d), the second aspect image 152F003 with a large red “V” is displayed as the notification effect according to the second aspect. In FIG. 12-12 (d), since it is “V × 3”, it is shown that there are three or more hits in the hold storage buffer.

FIG. 12-13 is an explanatory diagram showing a notification effect execution presence / absence determination table, a notification effect content determination table, a V mode determination table, a hit-time suggestion effect execution decision table, and a hit-time suggestion effect execution decision table. FIG. 12-13 (A) is a notification effect execution presence / absence determination table for determining whether or not to execute the notification effect. As shown in FIG. 12-13 (A), whether or not the notification effect is executed is determined at different rates depending on the set value. Specifically, in setting 1, it is determined that the notification effect is executed at 35% and the notification effect is not executed at 65%, and in setting 2, the notification effect is executed at 40% and the notification effect is not executed at 60%. In 3, it is determined that the notification effect is executed at 45%, the notification effect is not executed at 55%, in the setting 4, the notification effect is executed at 50%, the notification effect is not executed at 50%, and in the setting 5, the notification effect is executed. Is determined to be 55%, no notification effect execution is determined to 45%, and in setting 6, 60% is determined to have notification effect execution, and 40% is determined to have no notification effect execution. That is, in the order of setting 1 <setting 2 <setting 3 <setting 4 <setting 5 <setting 6, the ratio of execution is determined to be high.

FIG. 12-13 (B) is a diagram showing a notification effect content determination table. The pattern of the notification effect content to be executed differs depending on the number of hits in the hold storage buffer. Then, the determination ratio of the pattern of the notification effect content differs depending on the set value. First, when the number of hits in the hold storage buffer is 1, it is determined to be "V × 1" as a common notification effect content in settings 1 to 6. When the number of hits is 1, a common effect is executed regardless of the set value. Further, when the number of hits in the hold storage buffer is 2, the notification effect by "Vx2" or "Vx1" is executed. In the order of setting 1 <setting 2 <setting 3 <setting 4 <setting 5 <setting 6, it is easy to determine the notification effect content of "Vx2".

When the number of hits in the hold storage buffer is 3, one of "Vx3", "Vx2", and "Vx1" is executed. It is easy to determine the notification effect contents of "Vx2" and "Vx3" in the order of setting 1 <setting 2 <setting 3 <setting 4 <setting 5 <setting 6. Further, in each set value, "Vx3" is easier to determine than "Vx2". When the number of hits in the hold storage buffer is 4, one of "Vx4", "Vx3", "Vx2", and "Vx1" is executed. .. It is easy to determine the notification effect contents of "Vx3" and "Vx4" in the order of setting 1 <setting 2 <setting 3 <setting 4 <setting 5 <setting 6. Further, when the set value is low, the ratio of being determined to be "V × 1" or “V × 2” is high, and when the set value is high, it is determined to be “V × 3” or “V × 4”. The percentage is high.

FIG. 12-13 (C) is a diagram showing a V-mode determination table. The V aspect is provided with a first aspect indicated by a white small V display and a second aspect indicated by a red large V display. In any of the set values, it is easier to determine the first aspect than the second aspect. Further, the ratio of the second mode determined in the order of setting 1 <setting 2 <setting 3 <setting 4 <setting 5 <setting 6 is high.

FIG. 12-13 (D) is a hit-time suggestion effect execution decision table. When there is a hit in the hold storage buffer, it is determined that the suggestion effect is always executed regardless of the set value. FIG. 12-13 (E) is a hit-time suggestion effect execution decision table. When there is no hit in the hold storage buffer, regardless of the set value, it is determined at a rate of 30% that the suggestion effect is executed and 70% that the suggestion effect is not executed.

FIG. 12-14 is a flowchart showing the notification effect processing. The notification effect processing is included in the processing executed in the pre-reading advance notice setting processing (S161 in FIG. 7). The effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the current gaming state is at the start of a big hit (152FS001). Whether or not the notification effect is executed and the content of the notification effect are determined at the timing when the big hit starts. If it is not the start of the jackpot (152FS001; N), the process ends. If it is the start of a big hit (152FS001; Y), the inside of the hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 122 is confirmed (152FS002). This makes it possible to check whether information about various flags and commands is in the hold storage buffer.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the notification effect completed flag that is set when the notification effect is executed is set (152FS003). If the notification effected flag is set (152FS003; Y), the process ends. If the notification effected flag is not set (152FS003; N), it is determined whether or not there is a hold memory for a big hit or a small hit (152FS004). When there is a hold memory of a big hit or a small hit (152FS004; Y), the presence / absence of execution of the notification effect according to the set value is determined by the notification effect execution presence / absence determination table shown in FIG. 12-13 (A). 152FS005).

After 152FS005, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined to execute the notification effect (152FS006). If it is determined that the notification effect is not executed (152FS006; N), the process proceeds to 152FS010. If it is determined that the notification effect is to be executed (152FS006; Y), the notification effect completed flag is set (152FS007). Next, the content of the notification effect according to the number of hits and the set value is determined by the notification effect content determination table shown in FIG. 12-13 (B) (152FS008). Next, the V mode is determined by the V mode determination table shown in FIG. 12-13 (C) (152FS009). Next, the presence or absence of execution of the suggestion effect is determined by the hit-time suggestion effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 12-13 (D) (152FS010). In 152FS010, it is determined that the suggestion effect is always executed. After that, the process proceeds to 152FS011.

When it is determined in 152FS004 that there is no pending memory of a big hit or a small hit (152FS004; N), the presence or absence of execution of the suggestion effect is determined by the hit timeless suggestion effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 12-13 (E). Determine (152FS012). After that, the process proceeds to 152FS011. In the processing of 1523FS011, various determined effects are set to be executed during the ending of the jackpot (152FS011). Then, the process ends.

[Main configurations and effects obtained by the feature parts 152F and 153F]
[1] When the hold continuous notification is performed by a gaming machine having a setting function, the execution ratio of the hold continuous notification depends on the set value because the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value, and there is a possibility that the notification effect cannot be appropriately performed. is there. In the feature unit 152F, the effect control CPU 120 executes a notification effect to notify that the player is on hold, which is controlled to hit (big hit or small hit) during the ending period of the big hit game state. Then, in the feature unit 152F, as shown in FIG. 12-13 (A), when there is a hold memory of a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether or not the notification effect is executed at different ratios according to the set values 1 to 6. To. As a result, the notification effect can be executed according to the situation by changing the execution rate of the notification effect according to the set value. In this way, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by appropriately performing the notification effect on the game machine having the setting function.

[2] As shown in FIG. 12-13 (A), the setting 6 is determined to have the notification effect executed at a higher rate than the setting 1. Specifically, it is easy to determine that the notification effect is executed in the order of setting 1 <setting 2 <setting 3 <setting 4 <setting 5 <setting 6. As a result, it is possible to expect that the setting is high by executing the notification effect, and the interest of the game is improved.

[3] As shown in FIG. 12-13 (B), the execution rate of the notification effect indicating that a plurality of hits are stored in the setting 6 is higher than that in the setting 1. Specifically, when a plurality of hits are stored in the hold storage buffer, the notification effect regarding the same number as the number of hits is executed in the order of setting 1 <setting 2 <setting 3 <setting 4 <setting 5 <setting 6. It is easy to be done. As a result, a notification effect indicating that a plurality of hold information of the hit (big hit or small hit) determined to be controlled to the big hit gaming state (including the big hit via the small hit) is stored is executed. Expectations can be placed on the high setting, and the interest of the game is improved.

[4] The effect control CPU 120 can execute the suggestion effect by the suggestion image 152F001 shown in FIG. 12-12 (a). Then, as shown in FIGS. 12-13 (D) and 12-13 (E), the suggestion effect has a common execution ratio in the settings 1 to 6. As a result, since the suggestion effect is executed at a common ratio regardless of the set value, it is possible to arouse the player's expectation for the notification effect, and the interest of the game is improved.
[5] When the hold continuous notification is performed by a gaming machine having a setting function, the execution ratio of the hold continuous notification depends on the set value because the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value, and there is a possibility that the notification effect cannot be appropriately performed. is there. In the feature unit 153F, the effect control CPU 120 executes a notification effect notifying that the player is on hold, which is controlled to hit (big hit or small hit) during the ending period of the big hit game state. Then, in the feature unit 153F, as shown in FIG. 12-13 (C), when there is a hold memory of a big hit or a small hit, the notification effect in any V mode is performed at a different ratio according to the set values 1 to 6. Determined to be executed. As a result, by changing the mode of the notification effect according to the set value, it is possible to estimate the set value according to the mode of the notification effect. In this way, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by appropriately performing the notification effect on the game machine having the setting function.

[6] As shown in FIG. 12-13 (C), it is determined that the setting 6 executes the notification effect in the red-sized V mode at a higher rate than the setting 1. Specifically, it is easy to determine the V aspect of the second aspect of red size in the order of setting 1 <setting 2 <setting 3 <setting 4 <setting 5 <setting 6. As a result, it is possible to expect that the setting is high by executing the notification effect according to the second aspect, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Other modifications of the feature portions 1522F and 153F]
[1] If the notification effect is not executed while the player is controlled to the specified number of big hit game states and the specified number of times is controlled to the big hit game state, the setting is high (for example, setting 6). In, the notification effect may be executed at a rate higher than the rate at which the notification effect is determined to be executed. Specifically, when the notification effect is not executed even though the hold information of the hit is stored when the control is performed 10 times, it is determined in setting 6 that the notification effect is executed. The notification effect may be executed at a rate higher than 60%. If the notification effect is not executed for too long, the interest of the game may be lowered. However, in this way, it is possible to prevent the notification effect from being executed 10 times, for example, as a specific number of times, and the notification effect can be prevented. It is possible to improve the interest of. The specific number of times is not limited to 10 times, and may be any number of times, and only the number of big hits when there is a hit in the hold storage buffer but the notification effect is not executed is counted, and there is no hit. The number of big hits may not be counted. Further, as the number of big hits in which the notification effect is not executed increases regardless of the presence or absence of a hit, the ratio of determining that the notification effect is executed may increase.

[2] A plurality of jackpots having different advantages may be provided in the jackpot game state. For example, a 4R jackpot with a different number of rounds and a 15R jackpot may be provided. Then, in the jackpot game state, when there is a hold memory of the 4R jackpot, the notification effect can be executed at a higher rate in the setting 6 than in the setting 1, and when there is a hold memory of the 15R jackpot, the notification effect can be executed. The notification effect may be executed at a common ratio between the setting 1 and the setting 6. That is, when the jackpot unfavorable to the advantager is in the hold storage buffer, the higher the setting, the easier it is to execute the notification effect, and when the jackpot favorably to the advantager is in the hold storage buffer, the setting is made. The notification effect may be executed at a common ratio regardless of the value. In this way, even if a jackpot with a low advantage is executed after that, it can be expected that the advantage is low but the setting is high, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[3] When a plurality of hits are stored in the hold storage buffer, the notification effect by the large red V mode may be executed at a higher rate than the small V mode of white. In this way, when the notification effect in the red-sized V mode is executed, it can be expected that a plurality of hold information determined to be controlled in the jackpot game state are stored. The interest of the game is improved.

[4] Regarding the above-described embodiment, a variable winning means (V winning device) that allows the game medium to enter in a predetermined state (small hit) and a specific area provided in the variable winning means that the game medium can enter. (V winning opening), a first state control means (per type) that controls to an advantageous state based on the display result, and a specific area in the variable winning means that controls to a predetermined state (small hit) based on the display result. A game machine provided with a second state control means (per two types) for making the game medium enterable and controlling the game medium to an advantageous state based on the entry of the game medium into a specific area in the predetermined state has been described. In summary, the above-described embodiment is a big hit based on the fact that the game ball wins (V winning) in the specific winning opening (V winning opening) in the V winning device (so-called accessory) provided in the game area. We have described a gaming machine that shifts to a gaming state (so-called second-class gaming machine), but a gaming machine that shifts to a jackpot gaming state based on the variable display results of special symbols and production symbols (so-called first-class gaming machine). May be applied to. Even in such a case, the execution rate of the notification effect may increase as the set value increases. Further, as the set value becomes higher, the notification effect according to the second aspect may be more easily executed. In this way, if it is one type + two types of gaming machines, it is possible to appeal that it is a high setting by a notification effect, and if it is a type of gaming machine, it is notified without being based on the jackpot probability due to the setting difference. It is possible to easily adjust the execution ratio of the effect.

[5] In the above-described embodiment, the case where the notification effect is executed during the ending effect period of the jackpot has been described. However, the notification effect may be executed in a period other than that. For example, it may be executed in the round immediately after the start of the big hit or in the round during the big hit game. Further, the notification effect may be executed at a plurality of timings during the big hit game. For example, the notification effect may be executed during the period during the round and the ending period. Further, the ratio of which timing of the plurality of timings the notification effect is executed may be different depending on the set value.

[6] In the above-described embodiment, the total number of balls acquired during the round may be displayed when the jackpot ends. Then, when the jackpot ends during the execution of the display, the effect of reviving may be executed. Further, the notification effect may be executed when the revived effect is executed.

[7] In the above-described embodiment, the hold storage buffer is checked at the start of the big hit, and when the hold information of the hit is stored, the determination of whether or not to execute the notification effect is executed by one lottery. The case was explained. However, when there are a plurality of hits, a lottery for whether or not to execute the notification effect may be executed for each hit. Further, the ratio of whether or not the notification effect is executed may be different depending on the number of hits. For example, when there are a plurality of hits in the hold storage buffer, the execution rate of the notification effect may be higher than when there is one hit. This makes it easier to guess the set value in a state of low probability of occurrence that there are multiple hits in the hold storage buffer, and it is possible to execute a notification advantageous to the player in such a state. it can. Further, the execution ratio of the notification effect may be different depending on the timing at which the hold information in which the hit is stored is executed. Specifically, the execution rate of the notification effect when the variable display executed next after the big hit is a hit is higher than the execution rate of the notification effect when the variable display four ahead after the big hit is a hit. It may be.

[8] In the above-described embodiment, the case where the execution rate of the notification effect is higher as the setting is higher has been described. However, the lower the setting is, the higher the execution rate of the notification effect may be. In this way, even if the setting is low, it is possible to improve the interest of the production during the big hit by the notification production. Moreover, even if the setting is low, it is possible to have a feeling of expectation for the high setting. Further, the execution ratio of the notification effect may be adjusted to be the same for the high setting and the low setting. In this way, the notification effect is executed at the same rate regardless of whether the setting is high with a high jackpot probability or low with a low jackpot probability, so that it is difficult to guess the current set value.

[9] In the above-described embodiment, as the V aspect, the first aspect of small white and the second aspect of large red have been described. However, there may be a plurality of types of V modes, and only colors and shapes may be different. In addition, there may be a mode in which only a specific set value is displayed. Specifically, there may be a rainbow-colored V mode as a third mode that is displayed only when the setting is 4 or higher (setting 6 may be confirmed, etc.). Further, at the high setting, the second aspect may be displayed at a higher ratio than the first aspect.

[10] In the above-described embodiment, a plurality of types of modes may be provided in the suggestion image. Then, depending on the mode of the suggested image to be executed, it is suggested whether or not the image of V which is the notification effect can be acquired (whether or not it is displayed) and the number of V that can be acquired which is the content of the notification effect. May be good. Specifically, as a suggestion image, white, blue, and red modes are provided so that the expected degree of V acquisition and the expected degree of the number of Vs when acquired are increased in the order of white <blue <red. Good.

[11] In the above-described embodiment, the high setting confirmation pattern may be provided in the V aspect, and the high setting confirmation pattern may be executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, when the predetermined condition that there are four hits in the hold storage buffer is satisfied at the time of the settings 5 and 6, the notification effect may be executed with a probability of 100%.

[12] In the above-described embodiment, a pattern may be provided in which a specific set value is denied. Specifically, if the notification effect is not executed even though there are four hits in the hold storage buffer, the setting 1 may be denied. In this way, it is possible to pay attention to the period during which the pending hit is digested.

[13] In the above-described embodiment, the expectation of a high setting may be higher when the notification is the same as the actual number of hits than when the notification is different from the actual number of hits. Specifically, the case of notifying "Vx3" when the number of hits is 3, is expected to be higher than the case of notifying "Vx3" when the number of hits is 4. The degree may be increased.

[14] In the above-described embodiment, a case where the display of the V mode displayed on the screen is different as a change in the mode of the notification effect has been described. However, as the change in the mode of the notification effect, changes such as output sound, light emission by the game effect lamp, vibration, and air ejection may be executed. Specifically, in the notification effect consisting of the first aspect and the second aspect, the same display is performed on the screen, but when the notification effect of the second aspect is performed, only the player during the game can experience it. Vibration may be applied. In this way, only the player who is playing can know the suggestion of the high setting, so that it is possible to prevent another player who sees the display on the screen from aiming at the game table and playing. it can. On the contrary, the high setting may be appealed by notifying the high setting by a sound or a lamp. In this way, it is possible to give an uplifting feeling to the player who plays the game on the platform of the high setting suggestion.

(Explanation of feature unit 003AK)
Subsequently, the feature 003AK will be described. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 003AK is controlled to an advantageous state (a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state controlled to a big hit gaming state by V winning), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is held in a state corresponding to being controlled to the advantageous state. It is possible to execute a notification effect (holding continuous notification) that notifies that the information is stored (there is a big hit in the hold, and the consecutive villas in the hold), and the specific display (the notification effect is executed) The specific display means is provided with a specific display means capable of displaying (a display indicating that the hold information corresponding to being controlled in an advantageous state is stored), and the specific display means displays the specific display in at least the first aspect and the first aspect. It is possible to display by any one of a plurality of types of display modes including the second mode, which is more advantageous to the player than the mode, and when the specific display of the first mode is displayed, the second mode is displayed. When the condition for displaying the specific display of the mode is satisfied, it is possible to execute a change effect for changing the specific display from the first mode to the second mode.

That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to 003AK, there is hold information that is controlled to an advantageous state by executing the notification effect and displaying the specific display (there is a big hit in the hold, and the consecutive villa in the hold). In the situation where (to be done) is shown, the specific display may change to a display mode with a higher advantage. As a result, when the specific display of the first aspect is displayed, the player can be expected to change to the aspect having a high degree of advantage, and the interest of the game is improved.

Hereinafter, the characteristic parts of the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the feature 003AK will be described. For other parts not described here, the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the configurations of other feature portions described in the above-mentioned basic description may be appropriately adopted.

First, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the feature 003AK will be described. FIG. 13-1 is a flowchart showing the operation of the hold continuous notification process for executing the hold continuous notification of the feature unit 003AK in the jackpot game state. The hold continuous notification process is executed in the jackpot middle effect process of step S176 of FIG. 7. In the hold continuous notification process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not it is the execution timing of the hold continuous notification (step 003AKS001). When it is determined that it is not the execution timing of the hold continuous notification (step 003AKS001; No), the hold continuous notification setting process is terminated.

The execution timing of the hold continuous notification may be set to any timing from the start to the end of the advantageous state. In this embodiment, it is during a predetermined round (for example, 4 rounds, etc.) in the jackpot game state. In step 003AKS001, for example, it may be determined whether or not it is the start of four rounds. It should be noted that there may be a plurality of types of execution timings, and one of them may be determined. Further, the execution timing and the determination ratio of the execution timing may be different depending on the jackpot type of the jackpot game state under control and the jackpot type in the hold.

The execution timing of the hold continuous notification may be during the small hit game state in which the game ball can win the V determination winning device 87 as shown in FIG. 12-1. That is, the hold continuous notification may be executed during the small hit game state in which the V prize as an advantageous state is possible. In addition, although the advantageous state has not actually started, the interval until the advantageous state starts after the decorative symbols are aligned in the winning combination, and the variable display controlled to the advantageous state (for example, executed hold) The hold continuous notification may be executed during the variable display of the target of the continuous notification, etc.). In addition, in order to prevent the frequency of big hits in a short period of time from becoming excessive, if an interval is set before the advantageous state starts after the decorative symbols are aligned in the combination of hits, etc. By executing, it is possible to prevent the production from being delayed and the interest from being lowered.

When it is determined that it is the execution timing of the hold continuous notification (step 003AKS001; Yes), the hold continuous notification in progress flag indicating that the hold continuous notification is executed and the specific display is being displayed (hold continuous notification in progress) is on. (Step 003AKS002). In this embodiment, in response to the execution of the hold continuous notification, the specific display indicating that there is a hold inside hit is continuously displayed until the hit of the notification target. If the hold continuous notification flag is on (step 003AKS002; Yes) in response to the display of such a specific display, the hold continuous notification setting process is terminated and a new hold continuous notification is executed. do not.

In addition, when the specific display is displayed, a new hold continuous notification may be executed. In such a case, the specific display may be newly displayed or the display mode of the specific display may be changed according to the execution of the new hold continuous notification.

If the hold continuous notification flag is off (step 003AKS002; No), the hold information that is the hold information (second hold information) of the hold numbers 1 to 3 currently stored is hit (small hit or big hit). It is determined whether or not there is (step 003AKS003).

The effect control CPU 120 produces the information based on, for example, receiving an effect control command for designating the occurrence of a start winning prize or an effect control command for designating a pre-reading determination determination result from the main board 11. As the hold information for control, it is stored in a predetermined area (hold information storage area for effect control) of the RAM 122. FIG. 13-2 shows an example of the hold information storage area for effect control. As shown in FIG. 13-2, the "hold number" corresponding to the storage order of the hold information and the "display result" specified from the effect control command for designating the judgment result of the look-ahead judgment are held in association with each other. It is stored as information. The hold information of hold number 0 in FIG. 13-2 is hold information corresponding to the variable display during execution. In addition, each hold information includes information that can be identified as the "notification target" of the hold continuous notification, information indicating the "change timing" when the change effect described later is executed, and the timing of executing the erase effect described later. Information indicating the "erasure timing" is stored in association with each other. Information other than these (for example, fluctuation pattern information) may be stored in association with the pending information. In the hold information storage area for effect control, new hold information is stored within the upper limit number (4 pieces) each time a new start prize is generated, and each time the variable display ends or starts, the hold number is stored. The hold information of 0 is deleted, and the hold information after the hold number 1 is shifted to the lower hold number and updated.

FIG. 13-2 shows that the variable display during execution is a small hit, and the hold continuous notification is executed for the hold information of the hold numbers 2 and 3 in the big hit game state via the small hit. .. In addition, the execution timings of the change effect and the erase effect, which will be described later, are also stored. In the example shown in FIG. 13-2, a hit type as shown in FIG. 12-2 (a hit type in which a big hit occurs via a small hit is included) is assumed.

In the process of step 003AKS003, it is sufficient to refer to the effect control hold information storage area and determine whether or not the hold information for which the display result is a hit is stored in the second hold information of the hold numbers 1 to 3.

The hold information storage area for effect control may be provided with hold information corresponding to the first special figure and hold information corresponding to the second special figure. The effect control hold information storage area shown in FIG. 13-2 corresponds to the second special figure.

Since the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, the game usually proceeds by the variable display of the second special figure in the high base state after the end of the jackpot game state. Will be done. Therefore, in this embodiment, the hold continuous notification is executed for the second hold information corresponding to the second special figure (winning to the second start winning opening) as the target of the hold continuous notification. Therefore, in step 003AKS003, it is determined whether or not there is a hit in the second hold information. Although omitted in the figure, if a big hit occurs in the normal state, it is assumed that the number of second reserved information is small or small, so in this embodiment, the high base state (time saving state) is used. When a big hit occurs, the hold continuous notification is executed in the big hit game state (advantageous state). It should be noted that the hold continuous notification may be executed regardless of the game state.

It should be noted that the hold continuous notification may be executed for the first hold information corresponding to the first special figure (winning to the first start winning opening). For example, when a big hit occurs in the normal state, the hold continuous notification may be executed for the first hold information. The effect mode of the hold continuous notification in this case may be different from the effect mode of the hold continuous notification for the second hold information.

Up to four second hold information can be stored, but in this embodiment, the hold continuous notification can be executed for the second hold information of hold numbers 1 to 3. Therefore, in step 003AKS003, it is determined whether or not there is a hit in the second hold information of the hold numbers 1 to 3 instead of all the hold numbers.

For example, when four second hold information is stored and only the hold number 4 is the hold information that is a hit, and the hold continuous notification is executed for the hold number 4, the jackpot game state ends. After that, the variable display of the second special figure is executed three times before the variable display, which is the hit of the pending continuous notification, is actually executed. If it is the maximum variable display time (for example, 2 minutes) that can be selected by these three variable displays, it is the longest until the variable display that becomes a jackpot is started after the end of the jackpot game state in which the hold continuous notification is executed. It takes about 6 minutes, and it takes up to about 8 minutes to reach the jackpot game state. In this way, in order to prevent redundancy until the jackpot corresponding to the hold continuous notification is executed even though the hold continuous notification is executed, in this embodiment, the hold information of the hold number 4 is used. It is excluded from the pending continuous notification. As a result, it is possible to prevent the production after the pending continuous notification from being delayed, and it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

The hold information of the hold number 4 is not limited to being excluded from the hold continuous notification, the hold information of the hold number 4 may be the target of the hold continuous notification, and the hold information of the hold numbers 3 and 4 is held. It may be excluded from the target of continuous notification. Further, the hold information having the hold number 2 or less may be excluded from the hold continuous notification. For example, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) corresponding to each hold information may be pre-read, and it may be determined which hold information is to be the target of the hold continuous notification according to the change time. For example, up to the hold information whose total fluctuation time corresponding to the stored hold information is within a specific range may be the target of the hold continuous notification. By doing so, it is possible to secure an opportunity to execute the hold continuous notification while preventing the effect from being delayed after the hold continuous notification according to the fluctuation time corresponding to the stored hold information, which is preferable. Hold continuous notification can be executed.

If there is no second hold information of the hold numbers 1 to 3 currently stored (step 003AKS003; No), the hold continuous notification setting process is terminated. If there is a hit in the second hold information of the hold numbers 1 to 3 currently stored (step 003AKS003; Yes), it is determined whether or not to execute the hold continuous notification (step 003AKS004).

In step 003AKS004, for example, it is determined (determined) whether or not to execute the hold continuous notification at the ratio shown in FIG. 13-3 (A). As shown in FIG. 13-3 (A), in step 003AKS004, it is determined that the hold continuous notification is executed at a rate of 30%, and it is determined that the hold continuous notification is not executed at a rate of 70%. When there are a plurality of pending internal hits, it is determined whether or not to execute the pending continuous notification for each pending internal hit. If the execution judgment ratio of the hold continuous notification differs depending on the number of hold inner hits, whether the hold inner hit is a big hit or a small hit, the hit type (number of rounds, presence / absence of probability variation control, time reduction control, etc.), etc. You may let me. Further, the execution determination ratio may be any ratio as long as the hold continuous notification can be appropriately executed.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not it is determined in step 003AKS004 to execute the hold continuous notification (step 003AKS005). When it is determined not to execute the hold continuous notification (step 003AKS005; No), the hold continuous notification setting process is terminated.

When it is determined to execute the hold continuous notification (step 003AKS005; Yes), the execution timing of the erasing effect is determined (step 003AKS006). In this embodiment, in response to the execution of the hold continuous notification, a specific display indicating that there is a hit in the hold is displayed in a predetermined display area in the image display device 5. Then, the specific display is erased when the erasing effect is executed in the variable display that is the target of the hold continuous notification. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13-4, as the execution timing of the erasure effect, the timing TA before the reach effect is executed in the variable display that is the target of the hold continuous notification and the timing TB during the reach effect are executed. It is provided.

In step 003AKS006, for example, the execution timing of the erasing effect is determined at the ratio shown in FIG. 13-3 (B). As shown in FIG. 13-3 (B), in step 003AKS006, the timing TA is determined at a rate of 40% and the timing TB is determined at a rate of 60% as the execution timing (erasing timing) of the erasing effect. When there are a plurality of execution targets of the hold continuous notification, the deletion timing is determined for each hold inside hit. It should be noted that the determination ratio of the erasure timing is different depending on the number of pending internal hits, whether the pending internal hit is a big hit or a small hit, the type of hit (number of rounds, presence / absence of probability variation control, time reduction control, etc.), etc. May be good. Further, the determination ratio may be any ratio as long as the erasing effect can be appropriately executed. In this embodiment, the ratio of timing TB, which is the timing after timing TA, is high. By doing so, even if the erasing effect is not executed at the timing TA, the player's expectation can be maintained until the timing TB.

As described above, in this embodiment, the erasing effect is executed in the variable display that is the target of the hold continuous notification, and a plurality of execution timings of the erasing effect are provided in the variable display. As a result, the variable display of the execution target of the hold continuous notification is clarified by the erasure effect, and by providing a plurality of execution timings of the erasure effect, the variation of the effect is diversified and the fun of the game is improved.

The execution timing of the erasure effect is not limited to the timings TA and TB shown in FIGS. 13-4, and may be any timing until the hold continuous notification is executed. Further, the execution timing is not limited to two types, and may be three or more types, or may be executed in a variable display other than the execution target of the hold continuous notification. Further, the execution timing of the erasing effect may be constant. Further, at the execution timing of the erasing effect, an effect of inciting whether or not the erasing effect is executed may be executed. Then, the rate at which the erasing effect is executed may differ depending on the effect mode of the fanned effect. By doing so, it is possible to improve the effect of the pending internal continuous notification and the erasing effect, and the interest is improved.

When there are a plurality of execution targets of the hold continuous notification, the erase timing may be set so that the erase effect is always executed in the variable display having the youngest hold number (the execution order of the variable display is earlier). If the erasure timing of the specific display cannot be determined due to a malfunction of the control or RAM 122 or the influence of noise, or if the erasure timing cannot be read even though it is determined, the erasure effect cannot be executed and after the timing that should be erased However, there is a risk that the specific display will continue to be displayed. Therefore, after executing the hold continuous notification and displaying the specific display, the effect control CPU 120 receives an effect control command (a hit start designation command, etc.) indicating that the first hit after the hold continuous notification is executed. Based on this, the erasing effect may be executed. For example, when the specific display of the first aspect is displayed based on the reception of the effect control command, the erase effect for erasing the specific display of the first aspect is executed, and the specific display of the second aspect is displayed. When displaying, the erasing effect of erasing the specific display of the second aspect and changing to the specific display of the first aspect may be executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the specific display from being continuously displayed due to a defect, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable or distrustful.

After determining the execution timing of the erasing effect in step ASK006, a specific display pattern corresponding to the specific display mode displayed according to the execution of the hold continuous notification is determined (step 003AKS007).

In this embodiment, as a display mode of the specific display, a first mode and a second mode indicating that there are a plurality of pending internal hits are provided. Therefore, the specific display of the second aspect is more advantageous to the player than the specific display of the first aspect. In this way, by providing the second mode indicating that there are a plurality of pending internal hits, it is possible to notify that the number of hits will be multiple times with one notification, and the player can display the specific display in the second mode. You will come to expect that, and the interest of the production will improve.

In this embodiment, as the specific display pattern, a specific display pattern A for displaying the specific display in the first aspect and a specific display pattern B for displaying the specific display in the second aspect are provided. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 003AK, after the specific display is displayed in the first mode, a change effect is executed to provide a specific display pattern C that changes to the second mode. As described above, since the specific display is a display mode indicating that there are a plurality of pending internal hits and may change to the second mode having a higher advantage, the specific display of the first mode is displayed. It is possible to expect the player to change to the second mode by executing the change effect while the game is being played, and the interest of the game is improved.

In the second aspect, the number of hits in the hold is larger than that of the first aspect, so that the degree of advantage for the player is high, but the second aspect is more advantageous than the first aspect. Any aspect with a high degree may be used. For example, the second aspect may be an aspect showing that the hit type of the pending internal hit is more advantageous than the first aspect. For example, the second aspect may be an aspect indicating that the number of rounds of the jackpot gaming state per hold and the number of prize balls that can be obtained are larger than those of the first aspect, or the gaming state (probability change control) after the end of the jackpot gaming state. It may be an embodiment showing that the presence / absence of the above, the number of times of shortening the time, etc.) are advantageous.

In step 003AKS007, the specific display pattern is determined, for example, at the ratio shown in FIG. 13-3 (C), according to the number of hits within the hold of the execution target of the hold continuous notification. As shown in FIG. 13-3 (C), in step 003AKS007, when there is only one hold internal hit of the hold continuous notification execution target, the specific display pattern A is determined, and the hold continuous notification execution target is held. When there are two or more internal hits, the specific display pattern B is determined at a ratio of 40%, and the specific display pattern C is determined at a ratio of 60%. It should be noted that the number of pending internal hits including those not subject to the pending continuous notification, whether the pending internal hit of the execution target of the pending continuous notification is a big hit or a small hit, and the type of hit (number of rounds, presence / absence of probability variation control and time reduction control). Etc.), etc., and the determination ratio of the specific display pattern may be different. Further, the determination ratio may be any ratio as long as the specific display can be appropriately displayed. In this embodiment, when there are two or more pending hits for the execution target of the hold continuous notification, the specific display pattern C in which the change effect is executed is determined rather than the specific display pattern B in which the change effect is not executed. The rate of being done is high. By doing so, even if there are two or more pending internal hits of the execution target of the hold continuous notification, the ratio of being displayed in the first mode is high, so that when the specific display is displayed in the first mode. It is possible to suppress the disappointment of the player and raise the expectation that the change effect will be executed.

In this embodiment, as the display mode of the specific display, the first mode and the second mode indicating that there are a plurality of pending internal hits are provided, but as the display mode of the specific display, each of the reserved internal hits is provided. There may be three or more types of display modes in which the expected value of the number and the degree of advantage of the hit type are different. Then, with the execution of the change effect, the display mode may be changed from a display mode having a low degree of advantage to a display mode having a higher degree of advantage. For example, a first aspect, a second aspect having a higher degree of advantage than the first aspect, and a third aspect having a higher degree of advantage than the second aspect are provided, and the first aspect is changed to the second aspect, and further. A specific display pattern that changes to the third aspect or a specific display pattern that changes from the first aspect to the third aspect may be provided. By doing so, the effects related to the specific display become various, and the interest of the game during the hold continuous notification can be improved.

In this embodiment, when executing the hold continuous notification, it is determined whether or not to execute the change effect (whether to set the specific display pattern C) based on the number of hits in the hold of the execution target of the hold continuous notification. It has become. By doing so, it is determined whether or not to execute the change effect based on the hold information at the time of executing the hold continuous notification, so that it is not necessary to monitor the hold information after the hold continuous notification is executed, so that the processing burden is increased. Change effects can be performed without increasing.

After the specific display pattern is determined in step 003AKS007, it is determined whether or not it is determined to execute the change effect, that is, whether or not the specific display pattern C is determined (step 003AKS008).

When it is determined to execute the change effect (step 003AKS008; Yes), the execution timing of the change effect is determined (step 003AKS009). In this embodiment, as the execution timing of the change effect, as shown in FIG. 13-5, the timing 1-ta immediately after the start of the fluctuation of the first variation after the end of the jackpot game state in which the hold continuous notification is executed, and the timing thereafter. 1-tb, timing 2-ta immediately after the start of the second fluctuation after the hold continuous notification is executed, and timing 2-tb thereafter are provided. The timing (time from the start of the fluctuation) in each fluctuation of timing 1-ta and timing 2-ta is the same, the timing in each fluctuation of timing 1-tb and timing 2-tb is the same, and the first numerical value. Indicates the number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game state. That is, the timings 1-ta and 1-tb are the timings ta and tb of the first variation after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and the timings 2-ta and 2-tb are the timings of the second variation after the end of the jackpot gaming state. It shows that it is ta and tb.

It should be noted that the execution timings ta and tb of the change effect in the variable display of 1 are timings before the timings TA and TB which are the execution timings of the erase effect in the variable display of 1. By doing so, it is possible to prevent inconsistencies in the effects such that the erase effect is executed and the specific display is erased before the change effect is executed. In addition, it becomes possible to execute the change effect and then the erase effect in the variable display of 1, and the effect becomes more diverse and the interest is improved. Further, by setting the execution timing of the erasing effect after the execution timing of the change effect in advance in this way, it is not necessary to adjust the execution timing of each effect, and it is possible to prevent an increase in the control load.

As shown in FIG. 13-5, since the change effect is executed by any of a plurality of variable displays, the variation of the effect becomes diverse, and the specific display changes to a mode with high expectation at any timing. It is possible to pay attention to whether the production is executed, and the interest is improved.

In step 003AKS009, for example, the execution timing of the change effect is determined at the ratio shown in FIG. 13-3 (D) according to the hold number for the first time. As shown in FIG. 13-3 (D), in step 003AKS009, when the first hit is the hold number 1, the change effect is executed after the jackpot game state in which the hold continuous notification is executed ends. The timing 1-ta of the first variation of the above is determined at a rate of 40%, and the timing 1-tb is determined at a rate of 60%. In this way, when the first hit is the hold number 1, the erase effect is executed in the first change after the end of the big hit game state and the hit is obtained, so that the change effect is executed by the change. When the first hit is the hold number 2, the execution timing (change timing) of the change effect is determined at a rate of 10% at timing 1-ta and at a rate of 20% at timing 1-tb. It is determined at a rate of 30% for timing 2-ta and at a rate of 40% for timing 2-tb.

It should be noted that the change timing determination ratio may be different depending on whether the pending internal hit is a big hit or a small hit, the hit type (number of rounds, presence / absence of probability change control, time reduction control, etc.). Further, the determination ratio may be any ratio as long as the change effect can be appropriately executed. In this embodiment, as the change timing, the ratio of the later timing to the change timing that can be executed is high. By doing so, even if the change effect is not executed at the previous change timing, the player's expectation can be maintained until the later change timing.

The execution timing of the change effect is not limited to the timings 1-ta, 1-tb, 2-ta, and 2-tb shown in FIG. 13-5, and may be any timing until the erase effect is executed. Good. Further, the execution timing is not limited to two types for each variation, and may be three or more types or constant for each variation. Further, the execution timing of the change effect may be executed with a predetermined variation (for example, the first variation after the big hit game state). Further, at the execution timing of the change effect, an effect that encourages whether or not the change effect is executed may be executed. Then, the rate at which the specific display changes may differ depending on the production mode of the fanning effect. By doing so, it is possible to improve the effect of the pending continuous notification and the change effect, and the interest is improved.

After executing the process of step 003AKS009, or when it is determined not to execute the change effect (step 003AKS008; No), the image display device 5 or the like executes the hold continuous notification, and as shown in FIG. After the execution of the hold continuous notification, the setting for displaying the specific display in the display area in the image display device 5 in the first mode or the second mode is made according to the determination result in step 003AKS007 (step 003AKS010). Specifically, the effect control data for executing the hold continuous notification is read out, and the hold continuous notification is executed based on the effect control data. Then, when the specific display pattern A or the specific display pattern C is determined in step 003AKS007, the specific display is displayed in the first mode, and when the specific display pattern B is determined, the specific display is displayed in the second mode. Control to do so. Further, the RAM 122 is provided with a specific display mode storage area for storing information that can specify the display mode of the specific mode being displayed, and in step 003AKS010, the display mode of the specific display to be displayed (first mode or first mode). Information corresponding to (2 modes) is stored in the specific display mode storage area.

After that, the "notification target", "change timing", and "erasure timing" of the hold information in the effect control hold information storage area shown in FIG. 13-2 are updated according to the determination results in step 003AKS004, step 003AKS006, and step 003AKS008. (Step 003AKS011). Specifically, information (flags, etc.) indicating that the hold continuous notification is executed is stored in the "notification target" of the hold information determined to execute the hold continuous notification in step 003AKS004, and is determined in step 003AKS006. The "erasure timing" is stored in association with the corresponding hold information of the notification target, and the "change timing" determined in step 003AKS008 is stored in association with the hold information corresponding to the change timing.

Specifically, when the timing 1-ta or 1-tb is determined in step 003AKS008, the "change timing" of the hold information of the hold number 1 is stored in association with ta or tb, and the timing 2-ta or 1-tb is stored. When it is determined to be 2-tb, ta or tb is associated with the "change timing" of the hold information of the hold number 2 and stored. Thereby, by referring to the "change timing" of the hold information of the hold number 0 at the start of the change, it is possible to execute the change effect in the change and specify the change timing.

Subsequently, the hold continuous notification is set to the on state (step 003AKS012) indicating that the hold continuous notification is executed and the specific display is being displayed (hold continuous notification is in progress), and the hold continuous notification setting process is completed. To do.

In this embodiment, the deletion timing of the specific display and the change timing of the specific display are determined at the execution timing of the hold continuous notification (step 003AKS006, step 003AKS009). The erasure timing of the specific display and the change timing of the specific display may be determined at an arbitrary timing from the display of the specific display to the erasure. For example, at the start of a change during display of a specific display, it may be determined whether or not to execute the change effect in the change, and the change timing when the change effect is executed. Further, at the start of the fluctuation during the display of the specific display, if the fluctuation is the target fluctuation of the hold continuous notification, the erasing timing may be determined. When determining the erasure timing, if it is determined to execute the change effect based on the fluctuation, the erasure timing may be determined after the change timing. By doing so, it is possible to prevent inconsistencies in the effects (change effect, erase effect) related to the specific display.

FIG. 13-6 (A) is a flowchart showing the operation of the change effect setting process. The change effect setting process is executed in the variable display start setting process of step S171 of FIG. 7 before the start of the variable display. The change effect setting process is a process for executing a so-called Gase change effect in a variable display in which the specific display is displayed in the first aspect and the change effect is not determined to be executed.

The change effect of Gase is an effect that suggests that the effect mode of the specific display changes, but the change effect does not change as a result of the effect mode of the specific display. By executing such a change effect of Gase, the execution frequency of the change effect is improved, so that the player is expected to change to the second mode when the specific display of the first mode is displayed. The frequency of the game can be improved, and the player's expectation can be effectively fueled.

In addition, when the change effect is executed without executing the change effect of Gase, the display mode of the specific display may be changed without fail.

As shown in FIG. 13-6 (A), in the change effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first refers to the specific display mode storage area to determine whether or not the specific display is displayed in the first mode. Is determined (step 003AKS021). When the specific display is not displayed in the first aspect (step 003AKS021; No), the change effect setting process is terminated.

When the specific display is displayed in the first mode (step 003AKS021; Yes), the variable display is changed by referring to the "change timing" of the hold information of the hold number 0 of the hold information storage area for effect control. It is determined whether or not the specific display is changed by executing the effect (change effect that is not a ghost) (step 003AKS022). In step 003AKS022, it is determined whether or not the information indicating the change timing is stored in the hold number 0 of the hold information storage area for effect control. When the change effect is executed in the variable display this time and the specific display changes (step 003AKS022; Yes), the change effect setting process is terminated because the change effect of the Gase is not executed.

If the specific display does not change in the variable display this time (step 003AKS022; No), it is determined whether or not to execute the change effect of the Gase (step 003AKS023). In step 003AKS023, for example, it is determined whether or not to execute the change effect of Gase at the ratio shown in FIG. 13-6 (B). As shown in FIG. 13-6 (B), in step 003AKS023, it is determined that the change effect of Gase is executed at a rate of 10%, and that the change effect of Gase is not executed at a rate of 90%. If the number of hits on hold, whether the hit on hold is a big hit or a small hit, the hit type (number of rounds, presence / absence of probability change control, time reduction control, etc.), etc., the determination rate of the change effect of Gase is different. You may let me. In addition, the determination ratio may be any ratio as long as the effect of changing the shape can be appropriately executed.

In addition, even though it is the first aspect, the specific display is displayed, and it is confirmed that it will be a hit soon. Therefore, the ratio determined to execute the change effect of Gase is to execute the change effect of Gase. It is preferably lower than the percentage determined not to be. That is, it is preferable that the execution frequency of the change effect of Gase is not extremely high. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the specific display from being displayed and the growing interest being reduced due to excessive execution of the change effect of the Gase.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not it is decided to execute the change effect of Gase (step 003AKS024). If it is not determined to execute the change effect of Gase (step 003AKS024; No), the change effect setting process is terminated.

When it is determined to execute the change effect of the Gase (step 003AKS024; Yes), the image display device 5 or the like is set to execute the change effect of the Gase (step 003AKS025. In step 003AKS025, the change effect of the Gase is used. Based on the corresponding effect control data, control is performed to execute the change effect of the Gase. After that, the change effect setting process is terminated.

FIG. 13-7 is a flowchart showing the operation of the erasing effect constant processing. The erasing effect processing is executed in the variable display effect process of step S172 of FIG. 7 during the variable display. The erasing effect processing is a process for executing an erasing effect according to the display mode of the specific display at the erasing timing determined in the hold continuous notification setting process of FIG. 13-1.

In the erasing effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not it is the execution timing of the erasing effect based on the effect control hold information storage area and the elapsed time from the start of fluctuation (step 003AKS031). In step 003AKS031, it is determined whether or not the hold information indicating the erase timing (information indicating TA and TB) is stored in the hold information of the hold number 0 in the hold information storage area for effect control, and the information indicating the erase timing is stored. If so, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time from the start of fluctuation has reached the erasure timing. Then, the information indicating the erasure timing is stored in the hold information of the hold number 0, and when it is determined that the erasure timing has been reached, it is determined that the erasure effect is executed. If it is not the execution timing of the erasing effect (step 003AKS031; No), the erasing effect process ends.

When it is the execution timing of the erasing effect (step 003AKS031; Yes), it is determined whether or not the specific display is displayed in the first mode by referring to the specific display mode storage area (step 003AKS032).

When the specific display is displayed in the first aspect (step 003AKS032; Yes), the image display device 5 makes a setting for executing the first erasing effect as the erasing effect for erasing the specific display (step 003AKS033). In step 003AKS033, control for executing the first erasing effect is performed based on the effect control data corresponding to the first erasing effect. As a result, the specific display is erased.

After that, the pending continuous notification flag is reset to the off state (step 003AKS034), and the erasing effect processing is completed.

When the specific display is not displayed in the first mode (step 003AKS032; No), that is, when the specific display is displayed in the second mode, the image display device 5 has a second erasing effect for erasing the specific display. Make settings for executing the erasing effect (step 003AKS035). In step 003AKS035, control for executing the second erasure effect is performed based on the effect control data corresponding to the second erasure effect.

As described above, in this embodiment, the first erasing effect is executed when the specific display is displayed in the first mode, and the first erasing effect is the effect mode when the specific display is displayed in the second mode. A different second erasure effect is executed. For example, since the second erasing effect is executed in a situation that is more advantageous to the player than the first erasing effect, a mode that is more flashy, more intense, and has a larger amount of effect (volume, light amount, etc.) than the first erasing effect. It may be executed by. By doing so, it is possible to execute the erasing effect that matches the degree of advantage for the player, enhance the effect of the erasing effect, and improve the interest.

In this embodiment, when the second erasing effect is executed, the specific display of the second aspect is erased, but the specific display is displayed again in the first aspect. Therefore, after executing the process of step 003AKS035, the display setting for displaying the specific display in the first mode in the display area of the image display device 5 is performed (step 003AKS036). After that, the erasing effect processing is finished.

Subsequently, an example of the effect operation of the feature unit 003AK will be described. FIG. 13-8 shows an example of the effect operation when the hold continuous notification is executed in the jackpot game state. FIG. 13-8 (A) shows the image display device 5 when the display result is a big hit. The characters "big hit!" Are displayed on the image display device 5, and the number "777" (small symbol) is displayed in the upper right portion, indicating that the display result is a big hit.

After that, the first round of the jackpot game state is started. In the jackpot game state, for example, as shown in FIG. 13-8 (B), the current round display is displayed in the upper left portion of the image display device 5.

In this embodiment, the fourth round in the jackpot game state is the execution timing of the hold continuous notification. When it is decided to execute the hold ream notification, the round in the jackpot game state is digested, and when the fourth round is reached, there is a hit in the hold (holding ream) as shown in FIG. 13-8 (C). The specific display 003AK001 (first specific display 003AK001) of the first aspect showing "V" is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 as the hold continuous notification for notifying the person to stay. As shown in FIG. 13-8 (D), the first specific display 003AK001 is moved to the display area 003AK002 provided in the lower right portion of the image display device 5, and is reduced and displayed. Such display of the hold continuous notification and the specific display is executed based on the process of step 003AKS010 of FIG. 13-1.

The first specific display 003AK001 is continuously displayed in the display area 003AK002 at least until the variable display that hits the notification target is executed after the execution of the hold continuous notification. As a result, it is possible to continuously notify that there is a hit in the hold (becoming a consecutive villa in the hold), and the variable display of the notification target becomes easy to understand.

The specific display may not always be displayed after the execution of the hold continuous notification, at least until the variable display that is the hit of the notification target is executed. For example, a predetermined effect (notice effect or reach effect) is executed. In such cases, it may be temporarily invisible.

After that, when the big hit game state ends, for example, as shown in FIG. 13-8 (E), the image display device 5 displays the total number of prize balls in the big hit game state (“TOTAL”) together with the characters “big hit end”. The ending effect in which "XXXXX pt") is displayed is executed, and the jackpot game state ends.

When the jackpot game state ends, as shown in FIG. 13-8 (F), the image display device 5 starts variable display of the decorative symbol based on the hold information. In FIG. 13-8 (F), it is shown that the decorative symbols are variably displayed in each decorative symbol display area indicated by the downward arrow.

When it is decided to execute the change effect at the first variation after the end of the jackpot game state, as shown in FIG. 13-8 (G), the first specific display 003AK001 jumps out of the display area 003AK002 to display an image. It is enlarged and displayed in the center of the device 5, and the first specific display 003AK001 becomes invisible due to the effect as shown in FIG. 13-8 (H).

After that, when the effect disappears, as shown in FIG. 13-8 (I), the specific display 003AK003 (second specific display) of the second aspect showing "W" instead of the first specific display 003AK001 in the center of the image display device 5. Display 003AK003) is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 13-8 (G) to 13-8, an effect in which the specific display changes from the first specific display 003AK001 to the second specific display 003AK003 is a change effect. The second specific display 003AK003 is a display mode of the specific display indicating that there are a plurality of hits in the hold, and is more advantageous than the first specific display 003AK001. In this way, by making it possible to execute the change effect that improves the advantage of the specific display, it is possible to raise the expectation of the player when the first specific display 003AK001 is displayed, and the interest is improved.

For the change effect as shown in FIGS. 13-8 (G) to 13-8, the effect control hold information storage area is referred to in the effect display process during variable display in step S172 of FIG. 7, and the effect control hold information is used. When the change timing is stored in the storage area, control is performed to execute the change effect at the change timing (timing ta or tb).

After that, as shown in FIG. 13-8 (D), the second specific display 003AK003 is moved to the display area 003AK002 provided in the lower right portion of the image display device 5, and is reduced and displayed.

When the specific display pattern B is determined to display the specific display in the second mode from the beginning as the specific display pattern, the second specific display 003AK003 is displayed at the stage of FIG. 13-8 (C). The continuous notification will be executed.

Further, when the setting for executing the change effect of Gase is made in step 003AKS025 of FIG. 13-6, the same effect as that shown in FIGS. 13-8 (G) and 13-8 (H) is executed. After that, the effect of displaying the first specific display 003AK001 without changing the specific display is executed.

FIG. 13-9 shows an example of the effect operation when the first erasure effect is executed. In FIG. 13-9 (A), the first specific display 003AK001 is displayed in the display area 003AK002 of the image display device 5, and the decorative symbol "7" is stopped in the left and right decorative symbol display areas to reach the reach state. It shows that it is.

For example, when it is determined to execute the erasing effect at the timing TB (timing during reach) during this fluctuation, the first specific display 003AK001 is displayed from the display area 003AK002 as shown in FIG. 13-9 (B). It pops out and is enlarged and displayed in the center of the image display device 5.

Then, as shown in FIG. 13-9 (C), the entire image display device 5 is blacked out and becomes invisible, and the first erasing effect in which the first specific display 003AK001 is erased is executed. ..

After that, as shown in FIG. 13-9 (D), the decorative symbol "7" stops in the decorative symbol display area inside, and the display result becomes a big hit. In this way, in the variable display that is the target of the hold continuous notification, the erasing effect that the specific display is erased is executed. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect as if the specific display was digested and became a hit (big hit).

FIG. 13-10 shows an example of the effect operation when the second erasure effect is executed. In FIG. 13-10 (A), the second specific display 003AK003 is displayed in the display area 003AK002 of the image display device 5, and the decorative symbol "7" is stopped in the left and right decorative symbol display areas to reach the reach state. It shows that it is.

For example, when it is determined to execute the erasing effect at the timing TB (timing during reach) during this fluctuation, the second specific display 003AK003 is displayed from the display area 003AK002 as shown in FIG. 13-10 (B). It pops out and is enlarged and displayed in the center of the image display device 5.

Then, as shown in FIG. 13-10 (C), an effect that tears the image display device 5 is displayed, and a second erasing effect is executed in which the second specific display 003AK003 is erased.

Since the second erasing effect is executed in a situation that is more advantageous to the player than the first erasing effect, it is executed in a more flashy mode, a violent mode, and a mode having a larger amount of effect (volume, light amount, etc.) than the first erasing effect. It may be done. For example, the sound may not be output in the first erasing effect, and the sound may be output in the second erasing effect. Further, while the effecting accessory operates in the second erasing effect, the effecting accessory may not operate in the first erasing effect, or the amount of movement of the effecting accessory in the first erasing effect. May be less than the first erasing effect. By doing so, it is possible to execute different erasing effects depending on the display mode of the specific display. Then, the erasing effect suitable for the player's degree of advantage can be executed, the effect of the erasing effect can be enhanced, and the interest is improved.

After that, as shown in FIG. 13-10 (D), the decorative symbol "7" stops in the decorative symbol display area inside, and the display result becomes a big hit. When the second erasure effect is executed, the second specific display 003AK003 is erased, but the first specific display 003AK001 is displayed in the display area 003AK002. As a result, the second specific display 003AK003 can be erased to perform an effect as if it was a big hit, and by redisplaying the first specific display 003AK001, it is possible to continue to have a hit in the hold. Can be notified.

After the second erasure effect is executed, the first specific display 003AK001 is not redisplayed, and in the subsequent advantageous state, the hold continuous notification is executed again, and the first hold continuous notification is executed according to the execution. The specific display 003AK001 may be displayed. By doing so, if a hit occurs when the second specific display 003AK003 is displayed, the hold continuous notification may be executed again, so that the hold continuous notification can be expected to loop. become.

Further, after the second erasing effect is executed, the second specific display 003AK003 may be left displayed in the display area 003AK002. In this case, the second specific display 003AK003 may be continuously displayed until the erasing effect for the target of the hold continuous notification is executed. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the control burden of changing the specific display.

As shown in FIGS. 13-9 and 13-10, by executing the erasing effect of erasing the specific display in the variable display that is the target of the hold continuous notification, the variable display of the execution target of the hold continuous notification becomes easy to understand. .. Further, since the erasing effect is executed when the specific display is erased, it becomes clear that the specific display has been erased, and the discomfort of erasing the specific display can be reduced. In addition, the variable display corresponding to the specific display becomes clear, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

It should be noted that the effect mode of the hold continuous notification shown in FIG. 13-8, the display mode of the specific display, the effect mode of the change effect, and the effect modes of the erase effect of FIGS. 13-9 and 13-10 are examples. And the specific display need only be able to notify that there is a pending hit. Further, the change effect may be an effect indicating that the display mode of the specific display changes, and the erase effect may be an effect executed when the specific display is erased. In the case of such an effect, each effect may be an arbitrary effect executed by the effect device such as the image display device 5, the sound, the lamp, and the operation of the accessory.

For example, when it is possible to execute a hold change effect that changes the display mode of the hold display (or active display) to a mode with high expectation controlled in an advantageous state (big hit / small hit) in a short time state after the end of the big hit game state. In the above, the change effect for changing the specific display and the hold change effect may be started in the same or similar manners, and the effect in which either the specific display or the hold display changes as the effect result may be feasible. By doing so, since the specific display may change or the hold display may change after being started by the same or similar effect, it is possible to execute an unexpected effect. When performing such the same or similar effect, it is preferable that the rate at which the hold display changes is higher than the rate at which the specific display changes. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the unexpectedness when the specific display changes after being started by the same or similar effect. On the contrary, the change effect for changing the specific display and the hold change effect may be executed in different modes. In addition, there may be cases where it is started in the same or similar manner and cases where it is performed in a different manner. By doing so, the production becomes more diverse and the interest is improved.

Further, for example, in the change effect shown in FIG. 13-8 (G), the first specific display 003AK001 jumps out of the display area 003AK002, is enlarged and displayed in the center of the image display device 5, and is displayed on the second specific display 003AK003. Although it was supposed to change, it changed to the second specific display 003AK003 after the effect that the effect image flew to the display area 003AK002 was executed while the first specific display 003AK001 was displayed in the display area 003AK002. A change effect that does (or does not change) may be executed.

Further, in the change effect shown in FIG. 13-8 (G) and the erase effect shown in FIG. 13-9 (B), the first specific display 003AK001 jumps out of the display area 003AK002, and the image display device 5 A similar effect that is enlarged and displayed in the center of is executed, and then it branches into a change effect or an erase effect. By doing so, when the first specific display 003AK001 is enlarged and displayed in the center of the image display device 5, a change effect that increases the degree of advantage can be executed, or the fluctuation can be a hit. The player will pay attention to whether the notified erasing effect is executed, and the interest of the game will be improved. In the above embodiment, the execution timings of the change effect and the erase effect are different, but they may be executed at the same timing. By doing so, it becomes difficult to understand which of the change effect and the erase effect is branched, and the interest of the effect can be improved.

It should be noted that the introduction portion of the change effect and the erase effect is not limited to those that perform the same effect, and a clearly distinguishable pattern may be provided or a clearly distinguishable pattern may be provided. Further, the effect mode may be different depending on the execution timing of the change effect and the erase effect. For example, when the change effect or the erase effect is executed at the timing when the execution timings do not overlap, the effect may be executed in such a manner that it can be known which one is executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from being unnecessarily expected.

(Modification example of feature part 003AK)
This feature portion is not limited to this embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible, and further features may be added. Moreover, not all of the configurations described in the above-described embodiment are essential configurations, and some of them may be missing. Moreover, you may combine this feature part and other feature part as appropriate.

In the above embodiment, only one specific display is displayed, but a plurality of specific displays may be displayed at the same time. For example, when the degree of advantage of the hit type is indicated by the display mode of the specific display, the number of pending hits may be indicated by the number of specific displays.

In the above embodiment, it is determined whether or not to execute the change effect based on the hold information (the number of hold information to be hit) at the time of executing the hold continuous notification (step 003AKS007 in FIG. 13-1). On the other hand, it may be decided whether or not to execute the change effect based on the newly stored hold information while the hold continuous notification is executed and the specific display is displayed.

FIG. 13-11 is a flowchart showing an example of the change effect setting process in the modified example of determining whether or not to execute the change effect based on the newly stored hold information while the specific display is displayed. .. In the change effect setting process shown in FIG. 13-11, the same step number is assigned to the process in the same manner as the change effect setting process shown in FIG. 13-6, and the description thereof will be omitted. In the change effect setting process shown in FIG. 13-11 of the modified example, in addition to the process of determining whether or not the change effect of Gase is executed, whether or not the change effect that changes the specific display is executed is also determined.

Specifically, the processes of steps 003AKS041 to 003AKS043 have been added. As shown in FIG. 13-11, when the specific display is displayed in the first mode (step 003AKS021; Yes) and the specific display does not change in this variable display (step 003AKS022; No), it is for effect control. With reference to the hold information storage area, it is determined whether or not the hold inside hit has increased after the hold continuous notification (step 003AKS042). In step 003AKS042, for example, the number of hold information at the time of continuous notification of hold is stored, the newly stored hold information is specified from the number of fluctuations executed thereafter, and there is hold information that becomes a hit. Judge whether or not. If the hold internal hit has not increased after the hold continuous notification (step 003AKS041; No), the process proceeds to step 003AKS023 to determine whether or not to execute the change effect of the Gase.

If the hold internal hit increases after the hold continuous notification (step 003AKS041; Yes), the specific display of the first mode is changed to the second mode by executing the change effect during the current fluctuation. Make the settings (step 003AKS042). Control for executing the change effect is performed based on the effect control data corresponding to the change effect. Then, the "notification target" of the hold information corresponding to the increased hold inside hit in the effect control hold information storage area is updated (step 003AKS043), and the change effect setting process is terminated.

In this way, in the modified example, since the change effect can be executed based on the hold information stored after the hold continuous notification is executed, the change effect can be flexibly executed according to the start winning situation after the hold continuous notification. , You can increase the chances of executing change effects.

The processing contents and determination ratios of the flowcharts and the determination methods of various effects shown in the above examples and modifications are examples, and the same effects as those of the above examples can be obtained. It may be arbitrary as long as it can be carried out suitably.

(Explanation of means relating to feature unit 003AK)
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 003AK is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 003AK).
Hold storage means (for example, hold information storage area for effect control) that can store information related to variable display as hold information, and
When controlled to the advantageous state, a notification effect (for example, hold continuous notification) for notifying that the hold information corresponding to the control to the advantageous state is stored in the hold storage means can be executed. The effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of step 003AKS004 and step 003AKS010), and
A specific display means capable of displaying a specific display (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 003AKS010) by executing the notification effect is provided.
The specific display means
A plurality of types of display including at least the first aspect (for example, the first specific display 003AK001) and the second aspect (for example, the second specific display 003AK003) which is more advantageous to the player than the first aspect. It can be displayed by any of the modes,
The specific display of the first aspect can be displayed based on the fact that the first condition is satisfied (for example, it is determined as Yes in step 003AKS003), and the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied. (For example, in step 003AKS007, there are a plurality of pending internal hits, and in step 003AKS041 it is determined to be Yes), and the specific display of the second aspect can be displayed.
When the specific display of the first aspect is displayed and the second condition is satisfied, a change effect for changing the specific display from the first aspect to the second aspect (for example, FIG. 13-8 (G) to (I)) can be executed.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the specific display, and the interest of the game is improved.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The specific display may be continuously displayed until the variable display corresponding to the specific display is executed (for example, FIGS. 13-8 to 13-10).
With such a configuration, it becomes easy to understand the execution target of the notification effect, and the fun of the game is improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above
The specific display may be erased at any of a plurality of timings in the variable display corresponding to the specific display (for example, FIG. 13-4).
With such a configuration, it becomes easy to understand the execution target of the notification effect, the variation of the effect is abundant, and the fun of the game is improved.

(4) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (3) above,
An effect control execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the erase effect process of FIG. 13-7) may be provided to execute a specific display erase effect (for example, an erase effect) when the specific display is erased.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort when erasing the specific display.

(5) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (4) above,
At least, the hold information means is provided with a notice effect limiting means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 003AKS003) that restricts the hold information which is the upper limit number of the hold information that can be stored so as not to execute the notification effect. You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player is given a delay by extending the display period of the specific display.

(6) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (5) above,
The second condition is that a plurality of hold information corresponding to being controlled to the advantageous state is stored in the hold storage means (for example, there are a plurality of hold internal hits in step 003AKS007, Yes in step 003AKS041). It may be established by (determined to be).
According to such a configuration, after the notification effect is executed, it may be controlled to the advantageous state a plurality of times, so that the interest of the game is improved.

(7) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (6) above,
The specific display means can execute the change effect based on the fact that the second condition is satisfied (for example, there are a plurality of pending internal hits in step 003AKS007) when displaying the specific display. It may be.
According to such a configuration, the change effect can be suitably executed.

(8) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (6) above,
After displaying the specific display of the first aspect, the specific display means can execute the change effect based on the fact that the second condition is satisfied (for example, it is determined as Yes in step 003AKS041). You may do so.
According to such a configuration, the change effect can be suitably executed.

(9) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (8) above,
There may be a plurality of execution timings of the change effect (for example, FIG. 13-5).
With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the timing at which the change effect is executed, and the interest of the game is improved.

(10) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (9) above,
It is suggested that the specific display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, and it is possible to execute a pseudo change effect (for example, a change effect of Gase) that does not change as the first aspect (for example, the process of step 003AKS025). It may be feasible).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to effectively incite whether or not the first aspect is changed to the second aspect, and the interest of the game is improved.

(Explanation of means related to feature unit 004AK)
The feature unit 003AK includes the feature unit 004AK.
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 004AK is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 004AK (003AK)).
Hold storage means (for example, hold information storage area for effect control) that can store information related to variable display as hold information, and
When controlled to the advantageous state, a notification effect (for example, hold continuous notification) for notifying that the hold information corresponding to the control to the advantageous state is stored in the hold storage means can be executed. The effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of step 003AKS004 and step 003AKS010), and
By executing the notification effect, the specific display means capable of displaying the specific display (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 003AKS010) and
In the variable display corresponding to the specific display, the erasing effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the erasing effect process of FIG. 13-7) capable of executing the specific display erasing effect (for example, erasing effect) for erasing the specific display). And with
The specific display means displays the specific display in at least the first aspect (for example, the first specific display 003AK001) and the second aspect (for example, the second specific display 003AK003) which is more advantageous to the player than the first aspect. It can be displayed by any of a plurality of types of display modes including
The erasing effect executing means executes the specific display erasing effect in different execution modes in the specific display of the first aspect and the specific display of the second aspect (for example, FIGS. 13-9 and 13-10). ..
According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute the specific display erasing effect suitable for the degree of advantage for the player, the effect of the specific display erasing effect can be enhanced, and the interest is improved.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The specific display may be continuously displayed until the variable display corresponding to the specific display is executed (for example, FIGS. 13-8 to 13-10).
With such a configuration, it becomes easy to understand the execution target of the notification effect, and the fun of the game is improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above
The specific display may be erased at any of a plurality of timings in the variable display corresponding to the specific display (for example, FIG. 13-4).
With such a configuration, it becomes easy to understand the execution target of the notification effect, the variation of the effect is abundant, and the fun of the game is improved.

(4) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (3) above,
At least, the hold information means is provided with a notice effect limiting means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 003AKS003) that restricts the hold information which is the upper limit number of the hold information that can be stored so as not to execute the notification effect. You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player is given a delay by extending the display period of the specific display.

(Explanation of feature section 010AK)
Subsequently, the feature 010AK will be described. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 010AK is controlled to an advantageous state (a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state controlled to a big hit gaming state by V winning), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is held corresponding to being controlled to the advantageous state. It is possible to execute a notification effect (holding continuous notification) that notifies that the information is stored (there is a big hit in the hold, and the consecutive villas in the hold), and the specific display (the notification effect is executed). Specific display means capable of displaying (display indicating that hold information corresponding to being controlled in an advantageous state) is stored, and specific display for erasing the specific display at a predetermined timing of variable display corresponding to the specific display. It is provided with an erasing effect executing means capable of executing a display erasing effect (erasing effect). By executing such an erasing effect, it becomes easier to understand the target of the pending continuous notification. In addition, since the specific display is continuously displayed until the erasure effect is executed, it is possible to continuously notify that there is a big hit in the hold.

Then, in the feature unit 010AK, when the specific display is displayed and the specific display is not erased at the predetermined timing due to the occurrence of the predetermined event, the specific display is displayed at the specific timing after the predetermined timing. Special control to erase can be executed. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 010AK, if a predetermined event such as a defect occurs and the specific display is not deleted at the predetermined timing, the specific display is deleted at the specific timing. It is possible to prevent the player from being distrusted by the continuous display of the specific display even though the control is performed in the advantageous state to be notified. As a result, the hold continuous notification can be preferably executed.

Hereinafter, the characteristic parts of the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the characteristic 010AK will be described. For other parts not described here, the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the configurations of other feature portions described in the above-mentioned basic description may be appropriately adopted.

First, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the feature 010AK will be described. FIG. 14-1 is a flowchart showing the operation of the hold continuous notification process for executing the hold continuous notification of the feature unit 010AK in the big hit game state. The hold continuous notification process is executed in the jackpot middle effect process of step S176 of FIG. 7. In the hold continuous notification process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not it is the execution timing of the hold continuous notification (step 010AKS001). When it is determined that it is not the execution timing of the hold continuous notification (step 010AKS001; No), the hold continuous notification setting process is terminated.

The execution timing of the hold continuous notification may be set to any timing from the start to the end of the advantageous state. In this embodiment, it is during a predetermined round (for example, 4 rounds, etc.) in the jackpot game state. In step 010AKS001, for example, it may be determined whether or not it is the start of four rounds. It should be noted that there may be a plurality of types of execution timings, and one of them may be determined. Further, the execution timing and the determination ratio of the execution timing may be different depending on the jackpot type of the jackpot game state under control and the jackpot type in the hold.

The execution timing of the hold continuous notification may be during the small hit game state in which the game ball can win the V determination winning device 87 as shown in FIG. 12-1. That is, the hold continuous notification may be executed during the small hit game state in which the V prize as an advantageous state is possible. In addition, although the advantageous state has not actually started, the interval until the advantageous state starts after the decorative symbols are aligned in the winning combination, and the variable display controlled to the advantageous state (for example, executed hold) The hold continuous notification may be executed during the variable display of the target of the continuous notification, etc.). In addition, in order to prevent the frequency of big hits in a short period of time from becoming excessive, if an interval is set before the advantageous state starts after the decorative symbols are aligned in the combination of hits, etc. By executing, it is possible to prevent the production from being delayed and the interest from being lowered.

When it is determined that it is the execution timing of the hold continuous notification (step 010AKS001; Yes), the hold continuous notification in progress flag indicating that the hold continuous notification is executed and the specific display is being displayed (hold continuous notification in progress) is on. (Step 010AKS002). In this embodiment, in response to the execution of the hold continuous notification, the specific display indicating that there is a hold inside hit is continuously displayed until the hit of the notification target. If the hold continuous notification flag is on (step 010AKS002; Yes) in response to the display of such a specific display, the hold continuous notification setting process is terminated and a new hold continuous notification is executed. do not.

In addition, when the specific display is displayed, a new hold continuous notification may be executed. In such a case, the specific display may be newly displayed or the display mode of the specific display may be changed according to the execution of the new hold continuous notification.

If the hold continuous notification flag is off (step 010AKS002; No), the hold information that is the hold information (second hold information) of the hold numbers 1 to 3 currently stored is hit (small hit or big hit). It is determined whether or not there is (step 010AKS003).

The effect control CPU 120 produces the information based on, for example, receiving an effect control command for designating the occurrence of a start winning prize or an effect control command for designating a pre-reading determination determination result from the main board 11. As the hold information for control, it is stored in a predetermined area (hold information storage area for effect control) of the RAM 122. FIG. 14-2 shows an example of the hold information storage area for effect control. As shown in FIG. 14-2, the "hold number" corresponding to the storage order of the hold information and the "display result" specified from the effect control command for designating the judgment result of the look-ahead judgment are held in association with each other. It is stored as information. The hold information of hold number 0 in FIG. 14-2 is hold information corresponding to the variable display during execution. In addition, information that can be identified as the "notification target" of the hold continuous notification is stored in association with each hold information. Information other than these (for example, fluctuation pattern information) may be stored in association with the pending information. In the hold information storage area for effect control, new hold information is stored within the upper limit number (4 pieces) each time a new start prize is generated, and each time the variable display ends or starts, the hold number is stored. The hold information of 0 is deleted, and the hold information after the hold number 1 is shifted to the lower hold number and updated.

FIG. 14-2 shows that the variable display during execution is a small hit, and the hold continuous notification is executed for the hold information of the hold numbers 2 and 3 in the big hit game state via the small hit. .. In the example shown in FIG. 14-2, a hit type as shown in FIG. 12-2 (a hit type in which a big hit occurs via a small hit is included) is assumed.

In the process of step 010AKS003, it is sufficient to refer to the effect control hold information storage area and determine whether or not the hold information for which the display result is a hit is stored in the second hold information of the hold numbers 1 to 3.

The hold information storage area for effect control may be provided with hold information corresponding to the first special figure and hold information corresponding to the second special figure. The effect control hold information storage area shown in FIG. 14-2 corresponds to the second special figure.

Since the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, the game usually proceeds by the variable display of the second special figure in the high base state after the end of the jackpot game state. Will be done. Therefore, in this embodiment, the hold continuous notification is executed for the second hold information corresponding to the second special figure (winning to the second start winning opening) as the target of the hold continuous notification. Therefore, in step 010AKS003, it is determined whether or not there is a hit in the second hold information. Although omitted in the figure, if a big hit occurs in the normal state, it is assumed that the number of second reserved information is small or small, so in this embodiment, the high base state (time saving state) is used. When a big hit occurs, the hold continuous notification is executed in the big hit game state (advantageous state). It should be noted that the hold continuous notification may be executed regardless of the game state.

Further, the hold continuous notification may be executed for the first hold information corresponding to the first special figure (winning to the first start winning opening). For example, when a big hit occurs in the normal state, the hold continuous notification may be executed for the first hold information. The effect mode of the hold continuous notification in this case may be different from the effect mode of the hold continuous notification for the second hold information.

Up to four second hold information can be stored, but in this embodiment, the hold continuous notification can be executed for the second hold information of hold numbers 1 to 3. Therefore, in step 010AKS003, it is determined whether or not there is a hit in the second hold information of the hold numbers 1 to 3 instead of all the hold numbers.

For example, when four second hold information is stored and only the hold number 4 is the hold information that is a hit, and the hold continuous notification is executed for the hold number 4, the jackpot game state ends. After that, the variable display of the second special figure is executed three times before the variable display, which is the hit of the pending continuous notification, is actually executed. If it is the maximum variable display time (for example, 2 minutes) that can be selected by these three variable displays, it is the longest until the variable display that becomes a jackpot is started after the end of the jackpot game state in which the hold continuous notification is executed. It takes about 6 minutes, and it takes up to about 8 minutes to reach the jackpot game state. In this way, in order to prevent redundancy until the jackpot corresponding to the hold continuous notification is executed even though the hold continuous notification is executed, in this embodiment, the hold information of the hold number 4 is used. It is excluded from the pending continuous notification. As a result, it is possible to prevent the production after the pending continuous notification from being delayed, and it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

The hold information of the hold number 4 is not limited to being excluded from the hold continuous notification, the hold information of the hold number 4 may be the target of the hold continuous notification, and the hold information of the hold numbers 3 and 4 is held. It may be excluded from the target of continuous notification. Further, the hold information having the hold number 2 or less may be excluded from the hold continuous notification. For example, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) corresponding to each hold information may be pre-read, and it may be determined which hold information is to be the target of the hold continuous notification according to the change time. For example, up to the hold information whose total fluctuation time corresponding to the stored hold information is within a specific range may be the target of the hold continuous notification. By doing so, it is possible to secure an opportunity to execute the hold continuous notification while preventing the effect from being delayed after the hold continuous notification according to the fluctuation time corresponding to the stored hold information, which is preferable. Hold continuous notification can be executed.

If there is no second hold information of the hold numbers 1 to 3 currently stored (step 010AKS003; No), the hold continuous notification setting process is terminated. If there is a hit (small hit or big hit) in the second hold information of the hold numbers 1 to 3 currently stored (step 010AKS003; Yes), it is determined whether or not to execute the hold continuous notification (step 010AKS003; Yes). Step 010AKS004).

In step 010AKS004, for example, it is determined (determined) whether or not to execute the hold continuous notification at the ratio shown in FIG. 14-3 (A). As shown in FIG. 14-3 (A), in step 010AKS004, it is determined that the hold continuous notification is executed at a rate of 30%, and it is determined that the hold continuous notification is not executed at a rate of 70%. If the execution judgment ratio of the hold continuous notification differs depending on the number of hold inner hits, whether the hold inner hit is a big hit or a small hit, the hit type (number of rounds, presence / absence of probability variation control, time reduction control, etc.), etc. You may let me. Further, the execution determination ratio may be any ratio as long as the hold continuous notification can be appropriately executed.

Subsequently, it is determined in step 010AKS004 whether or not it is determined to execute the hold continuous notification (step 010AKS005). When it is determined not to execute the hold continuous notification (step 010AKS005; No), the hold continuous notification setting process is terminated.

When it is determined to execute the hold continuous notification (step 010AKS005; Yes), a specific display pattern corresponding to the specific display mode displayed according to the execution of the hold continuous notification is determined (step 010AKS006).

In this embodiment, as a display mode of the specific display, a first mode and a second mode indicating that there are a plurality of pending internal hits are provided. Therefore, the specific display of the second aspect is more advantageous to the player than the specific display of the first aspect. In this way, by providing the second mode indicating that there are a plurality of pending internal hits, it is possible to notify that the number of hits will be multiple times with one notification, and the player can display the specific display in the second mode. You will come to expect that, and the interest of the production will improve.

In this embodiment, as the specific display pattern, a specific display pattern A for displaying the specific display in the first aspect and a specific display pattern B for displaying the specific display in the second aspect are provided.

In step 010KS006, the specific display pattern is determined, for example, at the ratio shown in FIG. 14-3 (B) according to the number of pending continuous notifications to be executed. As shown in FIG. 14-3 (B), in step 010AKS006, when there is only one hold internal hit of the hold continuous notification execution target, the specific display pattern A is determined, and the hold continuous notification execution target is held. When there are two or more internal hits, the specific display pattern A is determined at a rate of 20%, and the specific display pattern B is determined at a rate of 80%. By doing so, when the specific display is displayed in the second mode, it is possible to notify that there are two or more pending internal hits. Further, even when there are two or more pending internal hits, the specific display pattern A may be determined. Therefore, even when the specific display is displayed in the first mode, there may be two or more pending internal hits, so that the player's disappointment when the specific display is displayed in the first mode can be reduced. ..

Note that this determination ratio is an example, and the number of pending internal hits including those not subject to the pending continuous notification, whether the pending internal hit of the execution target of the pending continuous notification is a big hit or a small hit, and the hit type (number of rounds). , Probability change control, time reduction control, etc.), etc.), etc., the determination ratio of the specific display pattern may be different. That is, the degree of advantage other than the number of hits may be suggested depending on the display mode of the specific display. Further, the determination ratio may be any ratio as long as the specific display can be appropriately displayed.

Further, as the display mode of the specific display, another display mode having a different degree of advantage from the first mode and the second mode may be provided, and similarly to the feature unit 003AK, the first mode to the second mode may be provided. It may be possible to execute a changing effect.

After the specific display pattern is determined in step 010AKS006, the image display device 5 or the like executes the hold continuous notification, and after the execution of the hold continuous notification, the specific display is displayed in the first mode or according to the determination result in step 010AKS006. In the second aspect, settings for displaying in the display area of the image display device 5 are made (step 010AKS007). Specifically, the effect control data for executing the hold continuous notification is read out, and the hold continuous notification is executed based on the effect control data. Then, when the specific display pattern A is determined in step 010AKS006, the specific display is displayed in the first mode, and when the specific display pattern B is determined, the control for displaying the specific display in the second mode is performed. Do. Further, the RAM 122 is provided with a specific display mode storage area for storing information that can specify the display mode of the specific mode being displayed, and in step 010AKS006, the display mode of the specific display to be displayed (first mode or first mode). Information corresponding to (2 modes) is stored in the specific display mode storage area.

After that, the "notification target" of the hold information in the effect control hold information storage area shown in FIG. 14-2 is updated according to the determination result in step 010AKS004 (step 010AKS008). Specifically, information (flag, etc.) indicating that the hold continuous notification is to be executed is stored in the "notification target" of the hold information determined to execute the hold continuous notification in step 010AKS004.

Subsequently, the hold continuous notification is set to the on state (step 010AKS009) indicating that the hold continuous notification is executed and the specific display is being displayed (hold continuous notification is in progress), and the hold continuous notification setting process is completed. To do.

FIG. 14-4 is a timing chart showing the execution timing of the erasing effect of the feature unit 010AK. As shown in FIG. 14-4, when the hold continuous notification is executed in the jackpot gaming state (big hit gaming state is ON), the specific display is displayed (specific display is ON).

After that, when the jackpot game state ends, fluctuation (variable display) is executed based on the stored hold information (variation is ON). If the change is the target change of the hold continuous notification, the erasure effect is executed in the change (hold continuous notification target change). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14-4, as the execution timing (erasure timing) of the erasure effect, the timing TA immediately after the start of fluctuation, the timing TB at the start of normal reach (when the left and right symbols are aligned), and the development of super reach Later timing TC is provided.

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution timing of the erase effect based on the effect control command received from the main board 11 at the start of the change of the hold continuous notification target variation. At the start of fluctuation, as shown in Fig. 14-4, the background designation command (here, the second time saving state designation command), the fluctuation special diagram designation command (here, the second symbol fluctuation designation command), the display result designation command, and the fluctuation pattern Multiple production control commands such as specified commands are transmitted. Then, in this embodiment, the execution timing of the erasing effect is determined based on the presence / absence of the effect specified from the variation pattern and the variation time.

In this way, when the command is normally received at the start of the fluctuation and the effect control CPU 120 executes the normal process, the timing TA, TB, or TC is determined as the execution timing of the erase effect. However, if the command cannot be received normally, or if the execution timing of the erasure effect is not normally determined due to the occurrence of some event (predetermined event) such as an error on the effect control board 12, the pending continuous notification target. There is a possibility that the specific display may remain displayed without the erasing effect being executed due to fluctuations.

At such an abnormal time (when a predetermined event occurs), the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 010AK receives a small hit start designation command (also referred to as a fanfare command) as shown in FIG. 14-4. Based on the above, the specific display is deleted at the timing TD during the big hit game state of the big hit via the small hit.

That is, when the small hit start designation command is received and the small hit is the target of the hold continuous notification, but the erasure effect is not executed and the specific display remains displayed, it is specified in the timing TD. Clear the display. By doing so, even if the erasing effect is not normally executed, the specific display can be preferably erased. And, even though it is a small hit (a big hit via a small hit) that is the target of the pending continuous notification, the player misunderstands that the specific display is not erased and the right to be a hit still remains. Can be prevented.

If the symbol big hit is not via the small hit, the specific display may be deleted in the timing TD based on the reception of the big hit start designation command.

As shown in FIG. 14-4, the erasure timing TD (specific timing) of the specific display when a predetermined event occurs is a timing after the erasure timings TA to TC (predetermined timing) of the specific display in the normal state. .. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the specific display from being erased at the specific timing, which gives a sense of discomfort, even though the predetermined timing at which the erasure effect can be executed still remains.

FIG. 14-5 (A) is a flowchart showing the operation of the erasing effect setting process. The erasing effect setting process is executed in the variable display start setting process of step S171 of FIG. 7 during the variable display. The erasing effect setting process is a process for determining the execution timing of the erasing effect when the specific display is erased (a variation that becomes a hit).

In the erasing effect setting process shown in FIG. 14-5 (A), the effect control CPU 120 first checks whether or not the variation pattern designation command has been received from the main board 11 by checking the receive command buffer of the RAM 122 or the like. Determine (step 010AKS021). If the variation pattern specification command has not been received (step 010AKS021; No), the erasure effect setting process ends.

If the variation pattern designation command is received (step 010AKS021; Yes), it is determined whether or not the hold continuous notification flag is on (step 010AKS022). When the hold continuous notification in-progress flag is in the off state (step 010AKS022; No), the erasure effect setting process is terminated.

When the hold continuous notification flag is on (step 010AKS022; Yes), whether or not this change is the notification target of the hold continuous notification by checking the hold number 0 of the hold information storage area for effect control. (Step 010AKS023). If it is not the notification target of the hold continuous notification (step 010AKS023; No), the erasure effect setting process is terminated.

When it is the notification target of the hold continuous notification (step 010AKS023; Yes), the execution timing of the erasure effect is determined based on the fluctuation pattern specified from the received fluctuation pattern designation command (step 010AKS024).

In step 010AKS024, the execution timing of the erasing effect is determined, for example, at the ratio shown in FIG. 14-5 (B) according to the fluctuation pattern. In this embodiment, as the variation pattern of the hit that is the target of the hold continuous notification, for example, as shown in FIG. 14-5 (C), the hit symbol (for example, the decorative symbol having the same number) is directly hit without executing the reach fanning. A variation pattern A in which the hit symbols are aligned, a variation pattern B in which the hit symbols are aligned after the normal reach, and a variation pattern C in which the reach effect of the super reach is executed after the normal reach and then the hit symbols are aligned are provided.

As shown in FIGS. 14-5 (B) and 14-5, the fluctuation pattern A has a short fluctuation time, and is, for example, a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation ends before reaching the timing TB shown in FIG. 14-4. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern A, the timing TA is determined to be 100%.

Further, the fluctuation pattern B has a medium fluctuation time, and is, for example, a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation ends after reaching the timing TB shown in FIG. 14-4 and before reaching the timing TC. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern B, the timing TA is determined at a rate of 50%, and the timing TB is determined at a rate of 50%.

Further, the fluctuation pattern C has a long fluctuation time, and is, for example, a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation ends after reaching the timing TC shown in FIG. 14-4. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern C, the timing TA is determined at a rate of 50%, the timing TB is determined at a rate of 25%, and the timing TC is determined at a rate of 25%.

As described above, in this embodiment, the execution timing at which the erasing effect according to the fluctuation pattern can be executed is determined. As a result, the erasing effect can be executed at a suitable execution timing. It should be noted that the number of pending internal hits, whether the pending internal hit of the execution target of the hold continuous notification is a big hit or a small hit, the hit type (number of rounds, presence / absence of probability variation control, time reduction control, etc.), etc. The determination rate of the execution timing of is different. Further, the determination ratio may be any ratio as long as the erasing effect can be preferably produced.

Subsequently, a setting is made to execute the erasing effect at the execution timing determined in step 010AKS024 (step 010AKS025). In step 010AKS025, for example, at the execution timing (timing TA, TB, or TC) determined in step 010AKS024, the effect control data for executing the erase effect is read out, and the effect control based on the effect control data is started. To do. After that, the erasure effect setting process is terminated.

FIG. 14-6 is a flowchart showing the operation of the erasing effect processing. The erasing effect processing is executed in the variable display effect process of step S172 of FIG. 7 during the variable display. The erasing effect processing is a process for executing an erasing effect according to the display mode of the specific display at the erasing timing of the specific display determined in the erasing effect setting process of FIG. 14-5 (A).

In the erasing effect processing shown in FIG. 14-6, first, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the erasing effect is executed based on the determination result of the erasing timing in the erasing effect setting process and the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation. Is determined (step 010AKS031). In step 010AKS031, when the current fluctuation is the notification target of the hold continuous notification and the erasure timing is determined in the erasure effect setting process, it is determined whether or not the erasure timing (timing TA, TB, or TC) has been reached. judge. If it is not the execution timing of the erasing effect (step 010AKS031; No), the erasing effect process ends.

When it is the execution timing of the erasing effect (step 010AKS031; Yes), it is determined whether or not the specific display is displayed in the first mode by referring to the specific display mode storage area (step 010AKS032).

When the specific display is displayed in the first aspect (step 010AKS032; Yes), the image display device 5 is set to execute the first erasing effect as the erasing effect for erasing the specific display (step 010AKS033). In step 010AKS033, control for executing the first erasing effect is performed based on the effect control data corresponding to the first erasing effect. As a result, the specific display is erased.

After that, the pending continuous notification flag is reset to the off state (step 010AKS034).

When the specific display is not displayed in the first mode (step 010AKS032; No), that is, when the specific display is displayed in the second mode, the image display device 5 has a second erasing effect for erasing the specific display. Make settings for executing the erasing effect (step 010AKS035). In step 010AKS035, control for executing the second erasing effect is performed based on the effect control data corresponding to the second erasing effect.

As described above, in this embodiment, the first erasing effect is executed when the specific display is displayed in the first mode, and the first erasing effect is the effect mode when the specific display is displayed in the second mode. A different second erasure effect is executed. For example, since the second erasing effect is executed in a situation that is more advantageous to the player than the first erasing effect, a mode that is more flashy, more intense, and has a larger amount of effect (volume, light amount, etc.) than the first erasing effect. It may be executed by. By doing so, it is possible to execute the erasing effect that matches the degree of advantage for the player, enhance the effect of the erasing effect, and improve the interest.

As described above, in this embodiment, the effect mode of the erasure effect is different depending on the display mode of the specific display, but the same erasure effect may be executed regardless of the display mode of the specific display, or the same. The erasing effect may be executed. Further, the effect mode of the erase effect may be different depending on other conditions such as the execution timing of the erase effect.

In this embodiment, when the second erasing effect is executed, the specific display of the second aspect is erased, but the specific display is displayed again in the first aspect. Therefore, after executing the process of step 010AKS035, the display setting for displaying the specific display in the first mode in the display area of the image display device 5 is performed (step 010AKS036).

After executing the process of step 010AKS034 or step010AKS030, the erase effect set flag indicating that the erase effect has been executed in this variable display is set to the on state (step 010AKS037), and the erase effect setting process is completed. To do.

If the erasure timing is normally determined in the erasure effect setting process of FIG. 14-5 (A) at the start of the target change of the hold continuous notification, the erasure effect setting process shown in FIG. 14-6 is executed. , The erasing effect of erasing the specific display will be executed.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern specification command is missed, if it is received but the normal command cannot be received due to noise, etc., a processing error in the erasure effect setting process and the erasure effect cannot be erroneously executed for the fluctuation pattern. When a predetermined event occurs such as when the erasing timing is determined (for example, when the timing TB or TC is determined for the fluctuation pattern A) and the erasing timing is not determined, or when the erasing effect is normally executed. If the specific display is not erased without being erased, the specific display is erased by executing the second erase effect setting process shown in FIG. 14-7 in the special figure hit waiting process in step S173 of FIG. Will be done.

In the second erasing effect setting process shown in FIG. 14-7, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms the reception command buffer of the RAM 122, and the like, from the main board 11 to the hit start designation command (small hit start designation command, big hit). It is determined whether or not the start designation command) has been received (step 010AKS041). If the hit start designation command has not been received (step 010AKS041; No), the second erasure effect setting process ends.

If the hit start designation command is received (step 010AKS041; Yes), the change executed this time (this time hit) is notified by the hold continuous notification by confirming the hold number 0 of the hold information storage area for effect control. It is determined whether or not it is a notification target (step 010AKS042). If it is not the notification target of the hold continuous notification (step 010AKS042; No), the second erasure effect setting process is terminated.

When it is the notification target of the hold continuous notification (step 010AKS042; Yes), it is determined whether or not the erasure effect completed flag indicating that the erasure effect has been executed in the variation executed this time is on (step 010AKS043). ). If the erase effect flag is in the on state (step 010AKS043; Yes), it means that the erase effect is normally executed in the change of the notification target of the hold continuous notification this time, so the erase effect flag is reset to the off state. Then (step 010AKS044), the second erasing effect setting process is completed.

If the erasure effect completed flag is in the off state (step 010AKS043; No), it means that the erasure effect is not normally executed due to the change in the notification target of the hold continuous notification this time. ) Is set to execute the erasing effect at the timing TD (step 010AKS045). As described above, the control of erasing the specific display based on the reception of the hit start designation command when the erasure effect is not normally executed due to the change of the notification target of the hold continuous notification is also referred to as the specific control.

After that, by referring to the specific display mode storage area, it is determined whether or not the specific display is displayed in the first mode (step 010AKS046). When the specific display is displayed in the first mode (step 010AKS046; Yes), the hold continuous notification flag is reset to the off state (step 010AKS047), and the second erasure effect setting process is terminated.

When the specific display is not displayed in the first mode (step 010AKS046; No), that is, when the specific display is displayed in the second mode, the specific display is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 in the first mode. The display setting for this is performed (step 010AKS048), and the second erasing effect setting process is completed. In this way, when the specific display is displayed in the second aspect and the erasing effect is not normally executed, the second aspect is the same as in the case where the normal erasing effect is executed. Control is performed to change the specific display to the first aspect. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from being given a sense of discomfort or distrust due to the continuous display of the specific display of the second aspect, which is advantageous for the player.

Subsequently, an example of the effect operation of the feature unit 010AK will be described. FIG. 14-8 shows an example of an effect operation when the hold continuous notification is executed in the jackpot game state and the erase effect is executed in the hold continuous notification target variation. FIG. 14-8 (A) shows the image display device 5 when a big hit occurs. On the image display device 5, the character image with the piece and the character "big hit" are displayed, and the number "777" (small symbol) is displayed in the upper right part, and the big hit (sign big hit or big hit via small hit) is displayed. It is shown that it has become.

After that, the first round of the jackpot game state is started. In the jackpot game state, for example, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (B), the current round display is displayed in the upper left portion of the image display device 5.

In this embodiment, the fourth round in the jackpot game state is the execution timing of the hold continuous notification. When it is decided to execute the hold ream notification, the round in the jackpot game state is digested, and when the fourth round is reached, there is a hit in the hold (holding ream) as shown in FIG. 14-8 (C). The specific display 010AK001 (first specific display 010AK001) of the first aspect showing "V" is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 as the hold continuous notification for notifying the person to stay. As shown in FIG. 14-8 (D), the first specific display 010AK001 is moved to the display area 010AK002 provided in the lower right portion of the image display device 5, and is reduced and displayed. Such display of the hold continuous notification and the specific display is executed based on the process of step 010AKS007 of FIG. 14-1.

The first specific display 010AK001 is continuously displayed in the display area 010AK002 after the execution of the hold continuous notification and at least until the variable display that is the hit of the notification target is executed. As a result, it is possible to continuously notify that there is a hit in the hold (becoming a consecutive villa in the hold), and the variable display of the notification target becomes easy to understand.

The specific display may not always be displayed after the execution of the hold continuous notification, at least until the variable display that is the hit of the notification target is executed. For example, a predetermined effect (notice effect or reach effect) is executed. In such cases, it may be temporarily invisible.

After that, when the big hit game state ends, for example, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (E), the image display device 5 displays the total number of prize balls in the big hit game state (“TOTAL”) together with the characters “big hit end”. The ending effect in which "XXXXX pt") is displayed is executed, and the jackpot game state ends.

When the jackpot game state ends, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (F), the image display device 5 starts variable display of the decorative symbol based on the hold information. In FIG. 14-8 (F), it is shown that the decorative symbols are variably displayed in each decorative symbol display area indicated by the downward arrow.

In the case of the target variation of the hold continuous notification, for example, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (G), the decorative symbol "7" stops in the left and right decorative symbol display areas and enters the reach state.

For example, when it is determined to execute the erasing effect at the timing TB (timing at the start of normal reach) during this fluctuation, the first specific display 010AK001 is the display area 010AK002 as shown in FIG. 14-8 (H). It pops out from the image display device 5 and is enlarged and displayed in the center of the image display device 5.

Then, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (I), the entire image display device 5 is blacked out and becomes invisible, and the first erasing effect in which the first specific display 010AK001 is erased is executed. ..

After that, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (I), the decorative symbol "7" stops in the decorative symbol display area inside, and the display result becomes a winning symbol. In this way, in the variable display that is the target of the hold continuous notification, the erasing effect that the specific display is erased is executed. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect as if the specific display was digested and became a hit (big hit).

FIG. 14-9 shows an example of an effect operation when the hold continuous notification is executed in the jackpot game state and the erase effect is not executed in the hold continuous notification target variation. The effect operations of FIGS. 14-9 (A) to (G) are the same as the effect operations of FIGS. 14-8 (A) to (G). When the execution timing of the erasure effect cannot be determined normally due to a predetermined event (command omission, error in the effect control board 12, etc.) at the start of the change of the pending continuous notification target, FIG. 14-9 (H) shows. As shown, the erasing effect is not executed, and the display result becomes a winning symbol while the first specific display 010AK001 is displayed in the display area 010AK002.

After that, by receiving the small hit start designation command (fanfare command), as shown in FIG. 14-9 (I), the image display device 5 displays the character image with the piece and the character "big hit". , The number "777" (small symbol) is displayed in the upper right part, and it is notified that the big hit (big hit via small hit) has been reached.

Subsequently, the first round of the big hit game state is started based on the occurrence of the V prize in the small hit game state, and as shown in FIG. 14-9 (J), the first specific display is displayed from the display area 010AK002. 010AK001 has been erased. This is the erasing effect in the timing TD.

In this embodiment, the image display device 5 is provided with a plurality of display layers so that different images can be displayed on each display layer. A display priority is set for each display layer, and an image of the display layer having a high display priority is displayed on the front side when viewed from the player. As shown in FIG. 14-9 (I), the effect of notifying that a big hit has occurred (fanfare effect) is performed from the display area 010AK002 (specific display) by setting the display layer higher than the display area 010AK002. Is also displayed preferentially. In this way, the display area 010AK002 (specific display) is hidden, and by erasing the specific display at the timing TD during the fanfare production, the player is given a sense of discomfort that the specific display is suddenly deleted. Can be prevented.

The specific timing for erasing the specific display when the erasing effect is not normally executed is not limited to the timing TD in the jackpot game state. For example, the specific timing may be a timing during fluctuation or a timing when the symbols are aligned. In this case, the specific timing is preferably a timing at which the specific display can be erased without discomfort. For example, when the specific timing is changing, it is preferable that the timing is later than the latest predetermined timing among the predetermined timings for executing the erasing effect. By doing so, it is possible to prevent inconsistencies in the effects, and prevent the specific display from being erased regardless of the erase effects at the stage where the erase effects can still be executed, giving the player a sense of discomfort or distrust. it can.

Further, the specific timing may be the same as the execution timing of the other effect, and the specific display may be deleted during the execution of the other effect. By doing so, the specific display can be erased without discomfort. For example, the specific timing may be set as the execution timing of the effect of operating the accessory. Then, for example, when the accessory operation effect is displayed on the image display device 5 along with the effect of operating the accessory, the display layer of the accessory operation effect is set higher than the specific display, and the accessory operation is set. You may want to erase the specific display while the effect is being displayed. By doing so, it is possible to erase the specific display without discomfort during the production of operating the accessory. In addition, when the specific timing is set to the big hit game state, the specific display is deleted based on the reception of the hit designation command, but when the specific timing is set during the change or when the symbol is confirmed, from the start of the change. The specific display may be deleted based on the elapsed time of the above or the reception of the symbol confirmation specification command.

FIG. 14-10 shows an example of the effect operation when the second erasure effect is executed. In FIG. 14-10 (A), the specific display 010AK003 (second specific display 010AK003) of the second aspect showing "W" is displayed in the display area 010AK002 of the image display device 5, and is displayed in the left and right decorative symbol display areas. It indicates that the decorative symbol of "7" has stopped and is in the reach state.

For example, when it is determined to execute the erasing effect at the timing TB during this fluctuation, the second specific display 010AK003 jumps out of the display area 010AK002 as shown in FIG. 14-10 (B), and the image display device. It is enlarged and displayed in the center of 5.

Then, as shown in FIG. 14-10 (C), an effect that tears the image display device 5 is displayed, and a second erasing effect is executed in which the second specific display 010AK003 is erased. As described above, the effect mode of the second erasure effect is different from the effect mode of the first erasure effect shown in FIG. 14-8 (I).

Since the second erasing effect is executed in a situation that is more advantageous to the player than the first erasing effect, it is executed in a more flashy mode, a violent mode, and a mode having a larger amount of effect (volume, light amount, etc.) than the first erasing effect. It may be done. For example, the sound may not be output in the first erasing effect, and the sound may be output in the second erasing effect. Further, while the effecting accessory operates in the second erasing effect, the effecting accessory may not operate in the first erasing effect, or the amount of movement of the effecting accessory in the first erasing effect. May be less than the first erasing effect. By doing so, it is possible to execute different erasing effects depending on the display mode of the specific display. Then, the erasing effect suitable for the player's degree of advantage can be executed, the effect of the erasing effect can be enhanced, and the interest is improved.

After that, as shown in FIG. 14-10 (D), the decorative symbol "7" stops in the decorative symbol display area inside, and the display result becomes a big hit. When the second erasure effect is executed, the second specific display 010AK003 is erased, but the first specific display 010AK001 is displayed in the display area 010AK002. As a result, the second specific display 010AK003 can be erased to perform an effect as if it was a big hit, and by redisplaying the first specific display 010AK001, it is possible to continue to have a hit in the hold. Can be notified.

After the second erasure effect is executed, the first specific display 010AK001 is not redisplayed, and in the subsequent advantageous state, the hold continuous notification is executed again, and the first hold continuous notification is executed according to the execution. The specific display 010AK001 may be displayed. By doing so, if a hit occurs when the second specific display 010AK003 is displayed, the hold continuous notification may be executed again, so that the hold continuous notification can be expected to loop. become.

As shown in FIG. 14-10, by executing the erasing effect of erasing the specific display in the variable display that is the target of the hold continuous notification, the variable display of the execution target of the hold continuous notification becomes easy to understand. Further, since the erasing effect is executed when the specific display is erased, it becomes clear that the specific display has been erased, and the discomfort of erasing the specific display can be reduced. In addition, the variable display corresponding to the specific display becomes clear, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

FIG. 14-11 shows an example of an effect operation when the erasure effect (second erasure effect) is not executed in the hold continuous notification target variation when the second specific display 010AK003 is displayed. In FIG. 14-11 (A), the specific display 010AK003 (second specific display 010AK003) of the second aspect showing "W" is displayed in the display area 010AK002 of the image display device 5, and is displayed in the left and right decorative symbol display areas. It indicates that the decorative symbol of "7" has stopped and is in the reach state.

When the execution timing of the erasure effect cannot be determined normally due to a predetermined event (command omission, error in the effect control board 12, etc.) at the start of the change of the pending continuous notification target, FIG. 14-11 (B) shows. As shown, the erasing effect is not executed, and the display result becomes a winning symbol while the second specific display 010AK003 is displayed in the display area 010AK002.

After that, by receiving the small hit start designation command (fanfare command), as shown in FIG. 14-11 (C), the image display device 5 displays the character image with the piece and the character "big hit". , The number "777" (small symbol) is displayed in the upper right part, and it is notified that the big hit (big hit via small hit) has been reached.

Subsequently, the first round of the jackpot game state is started, and as shown in FIG. 14-11 (D), the second specific display 010AK003 of the display area 010AK002 is changed to the first specific display 010AK001. This is the second erasing effect in the timing TD.

In this way, when the second specific display 010AK003 is displayed and the erasure effect (second erasure effect) is not executed in the pending continuous notification target variation, the second specific display 010AK003 is the second in the timing TD. 1 Control to change to the specific display 010AK001 is executed. As a result, even though the player is controlled to the big hit game state (small hit game state), the specific display of the second mode, which is an advantageous mode for the player, is displayed continuously, and the player is expected excessively. After that, it is possible to prevent the player from being distrusted without being as advantageous as expected.

(Modification example of feature part 010AK)
This feature portion is not limited to this embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible, and further features may be added. Moreover, not all of the configurations described in the above-described embodiment are essential configurations, and some of them may be missing. Moreover, you may combine this feature part and other feature part as appropriate. For example, the change effect related to the feature unit 003AK may be executed. Further, the means of the feature unit 003AK or the feature unit 004AK may be adopted for the feature unit 010AK.

In the above embodiment, only one specific display is displayed, but a plurality of specific displays may be displayed at the same time. For example, when the degree of advantage of the hit type is indicated by the display mode of the specific display, the number of pending hits may be indicated by the number of specific displays.

The pending continuous notification, the specific display, the erasing effect, and the effect mode and the display mode when erasing the specific display at the specific timing of the above embodiment are examples, and the effect mode and the display mode of each effect may be arbitrary. For example, in the above embodiment, there are a plurality of types of specific display and erasing effects, but one type may be used.

The processing contents and determination ratios of the flowcharts and the determination methods of various effects shown in the above-described examples and modifications are merely examples, and the same effects as those of the above-described examples can be obtained. It may be arbitrary as long as it can be carried out suitably.

(Explanation of Means Concerning Feature 010AK)
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 010AK is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 010AK).
Hold storage means (for example, hold information storage area for effect control) that can store information related to variable display as hold information, and
When controlled to the advantageous state, a notification effect (for example, hold continuous notification) for notifying that the hold information corresponding to the control to the advantageous state is stored in the hold storage means can be executed. The effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of step 010AKS004 and step 010AKS007) and
By executing the notification effect, the specific display means capable of displaying the specific display (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 010AKS007) and
An erasing effect executing means (for example, step 010AKS024) capable of executing a specific display erasing effect (for example, erasing effect) for erasing the specific display at a predetermined timing (for example, timing TA, TB, or TC) of the variable display corresponding to the specific display. The effect control CPU 120) that executes the process of step 010AKS025 is provided.
If the specific display is not erased at the predetermined timing due to a predetermined event (for example, an error in the omission of the fluctuation pattern command or the deletion effect setting process) while the specific display is displayed, the specific display is not deleted at the predetermined timing. It is also possible to execute a special control for erasing the specific display at a later specific timing (for example, timing TD) (for example, the process of step 010AKS045 can be executed).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being distrusted by the continuous display of the specific display, and it is possible to preferably execute the notification effect.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A game control means for controlling the progress of the game (for example, a main board 11, a game control microcomputer 100, a CPU 103), and
The effect control means (for example, the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120) that controls the effect based on the information from the game control means is provided.
When the specific display is not erased at the predetermined timing because the effect control means cannot normally receive information (for example, a variation pattern designation command) from the game control means at the start of variable display, the game control means. The special control may be executed based on the information received from the means at the start of the advantageous state (for example, a hit start designation command).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being distrusted by the continuous display of the specific display, and it is possible to preferably execute the notification effect.

(3) In the gaming machine of (2) above
The display priority of the effect at the start of the advantageous state, which is executed based on the information received at the start of the advantageous state, is set higher than that of the specific display.
During the effect period at the start of the advantageous state, the specific display may be erased (for example, FIGS. 14-9 (H) to (J)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being distrusted by the continuous display of the specific display, and it is possible to preferably execute the notification effect.

(4) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (3) above,
There are multiple predetermined timings,
The specific timing may be a timing after the last timing among the plurality of predetermined timings (for example, FIG. 14-4).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the specific display from being erased in a situation where the execution timing of the specific display erase effect still remains, which gives the player a sense of discomfort.

(5) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (4) above,
The specific display means can display the specific display by any one of a plurality of types of display modes including at least the first mode and the second mode which is more advantageous to the player than the first mode. ,
When the specific display is displayed in the second aspect and the specific display is not erased at the predetermined timing due to the occurrence of a predetermined event, the display mode of the specific display is displayed at the specific timing in the first aspect. It may be possible to execute the control for changing from the aspect to the second aspect (for example, FIG. 14-11).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being distrusted by the continuous display of the specific display of the second aspect, and it is possible to preferably execute the notification effect.

(Explanation related to the association of feature parts)
Each configuration relating to the feature portion may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration relating to the other feature portion. The feature portions thus combined or the individual feature portions that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to the other feature portions.

It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and it is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A 1st special symbol display device 4B 2nd special symbol display device 5 Image display device 103 CPU
120 Production control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Display means and
A variable winning means that can change the game medium into a first state in which it is easy to win a prize and a second state in which the game medium cannot win or is difficult to win.
A control means capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state a plurality of times when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state. With
The display means
It is possible to display the grant amount display regarding the grant amount of the game value given by the game medium winning the variable winning means.
When the first round game of the plurality of round games is performed, the grant amount display is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. ,
If the game medium does not win the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value is not given is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period.
When the game medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period, the specific display is displayed without displaying the predetermined display.
further,
A hold storage means that can store information related to variable display as hold information,
A notification effect executing means capable of executing a notification effect for notifying that the hold information corresponding to being controlled in the advantageous state is stored in the hold storage means when controlled to the advantageous state.
By executing the notification effect, a specific display means capable of displaying a specific display and
It is provided with an erasing effect executing means capable of executing a specific display erasing effect for erasing the specific display at a predetermined timing of a variable display corresponding to the specific display.
When the specific display is displayed, if the specific display is not deleted at the predetermined timing due to the occurrence of a predetermined event, a special control for deleting the specific display at a specific timing after the predetermined timing is performed. A gaming machine characterized by being feasible.

Images